WO2021024650A1 - Photosensitive transfer member, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel - Google Patents

Photosensitive transfer member, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021024650A1
WO2021024650A1 PCT/JP2020/025664 JP2020025664W WO2021024650A1 WO 2021024650 A1 WO2021024650 A1 WO 2021024650A1 JP 2020025664 W JP2020025664 W JP 2020025664W WO 2021024650 A1 WO2021024650 A1 WO 2021024650A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
polymer
structural unit
resin layer
photosensitive resin
group
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2020/025664
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
知樹 松田
壮二 石坂
晃男 片山
山田 悟
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to CN202080055251.3A priority Critical patent/CN114207525A/en
Priority to JP2021537622A priority patent/JPWO2021024650A1/ja
Publication of WO2021024650A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021024650A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • G03F7/0392Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists the macromolecular compound being present in a chemically amplified positive photoresist composition
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F220/00Copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical or a salt, anhydride ester, amide, imide or nitrile thereof
    • C08F220/02Monocarboxylic acids having less than ten carbon atoms; Derivatives thereof
    • C08F220/10Esters
    • C08F220/26Esters containing oxygen in addition to the carboxy oxygen
    • C08F220/32Esters containing oxygen in addition to the carboxy oxygen containing epoxy radicals
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/039Macromolecular compounds which are photodegradable, e.g. positive electron resists
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G06F3/0412Digitisers structurally integrated in a display
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/02Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding
    • H05K3/06Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding the conductive material being removed chemically or electrolytically, e.g. by photo-etch process
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2203/00Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/041Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/041 - G06F3/045
    • G06F2203/04103Manufacturing, i.e. details related to manufacturing processes specially suited for touch sensitive devices

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a photosensitive transfer member, a resin pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method.
  • a display device equipped with a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device (specifically, an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, a liquid crystal display device, etc. as a display device)
  • a capacitance type input device specifically, an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, a liquid crystal display device, etc.
  • EL organic electroluminescence
  • the peripheral wiring portion, and the wiring of the take-out wiring portion and the like are provided inside the touch panel.
  • a photosensitive transfer member also referred to as a photosensitive transfer material
  • a method of developing after exposing a layer of a photosensitive resin composition provided on a substrate through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
  • Patent Document 1 a photosensitive transfer material comprising "a support and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing the following (A) polymer component and (B) photoacid generator” in this order. .. (A) A polymer component containing a polymer that satisfies at least one of the following (1) and (2).
  • a polymer having a structural unit (a1) having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-degradable group and a polymer having a structural unit (a2) having a crosslinkable group are both included.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a structural unit having at least one of an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group as the structural unit (a2) having a crosslinkable group.
  • the present inventors performed a positive pattern formation using the photosensitive transfer material described in Patent Document 1, and when the pattern was formed by developing after leaving it for a predetermined time after exposure (in other words, leaving it behind). After that, when the pattern was formed by development), it was found that the line width of the pattern may fluctuate depending on the leaving time. After that, the fact that the line width of the pattern formed when the pattern is formed by developing after leaving it for a predetermined time after exposure is also referred to as "the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement after exposure is small”. .. Further, the photosensitive transfer material is also required to have excellent resolution of the formed pattern as a basic performance.
  • the present inventors have found that the above problems can be solved if the photosensitive resin layer has a predetermined composition, and have completed the present invention. That is, it was found that the above problem can be solved by the following configuration.
  • a photosensitive transfer member having a temporary support and a photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is One or more of polymer X and polymer Y, Contains photoacid generators,
  • the polymer X contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group and a structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton.
  • the polymer Y contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a structural unit B having a 3- or 4-membered ether skeleton, and a structural unit C having a basic group.
  • the content of the structural unit B having the ether skeleton of the 3-membered ring or the 4-membered ring in the photosensitive resin layer is 8.0 to 700.0 ⁇ mol / g with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X
  • the photosensitive resin layer further contains a basic compound.
  • the total content of the structural unit C having the basic group and the basic compound is 3.0 to 100.0 ⁇ mol / g with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer [1].
  • the photosensitive transfer member according to.
  • the total content of the low molecular weight compound having an acid group in the photosensitive resin layer and the structural unit having an acid group contained in the polymer containing the structural unit having an acid group is the photosensitive.
  • the structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group in the polymer X and the polymer Y is a structural unit represented by the formula A3 described later, [1] to [3]. ].
  • the photosensitive transfer member according to any one of.
  • the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the polymer X and the polymer Y is selected from the group consisting of structural units represented by the formulas B11 to B13 described later. , [1] to [6].
  • a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring comprising, in this order, a step of etching the conductive layer in a region where the resin pattern is not arranged.
  • the present invention it is possible to provide a photosensitive transfer member in which the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement after exposure is small and the resolution of the formed pattern is also excellent. Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a resin pattern using the photosensitive transfer member, a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring, and a method for manufacturing a touch panel.
  • the present invention will be described in detail.
  • the description of the constituent elements described below may be based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
  • the notation without substitution and non-substitution includes a group having a substituent as well as a group having no substituent.
  • the "alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • the "organic group” in the present specification means a group containing at least one carbon atom. Unless otherwise specified, the substituent is preferably a monovalent substituent. In the present specification, "-" is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after the value are included as the lower limit value and the upper limit value. The bonding direction of the divalent group described in the present specification is not limited unless otherwise specified. For example, when Y is -COO- in the compound represented by the general formula "XYZ", Y may be -CO-O-, and is -O-CO-. You may. That is, the compound may be "X-CO-O-Z" or "X-O-CO-Z".
  • (meth) acrylate represents acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth) acrylic represents acrylic and methacrylic.
  • exposure includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified.
  • particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified.
  • the light used for exposure generally, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV (Extreme Ultraviolet) light), X-rays, and active rays such as electron beams ( Active energy rays).
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the resin are columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (all trade names manufactured by Toso Co., Ltd.) unless otherwise specified. It is a molecular weight converted by using polystyrene as a standard substance detected by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer using the solvent THF (tetrahydrofuran) and a differential refractometer.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • process is included in this term as long as the intended purpose of the process is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes as well as an independent process.
  • examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
  • the photosensitive transfer member of the present invention is A photosensitive transfer member having a temporary support and a photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is Any one or more of the polymer X and the polymer Y (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific polymer”) and Contains photoacid generators,
  • the polymer X contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group and a structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton.
  • the polymer Y contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a structural unit B having a 3- or 4-membered ether skeleton, and a structural unit C having a basic group.
  • the content of the structural unit B having the ether skeleton of the 3-membered ring or the 4-membered ring in the photosensitive resin layer is 8.0 to 700.0 ⁇ mol / g with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X
  • the photosensitive resin layer further contains a basic compound.
  • a feature of the photosensitive transfer member of the present invention is that it contains a constituent unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in a predetermined content.
  • the 3-membered or 4-membered ether skeleton in the structural unit B functions as a base for the strong acid generated in the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the constituent unit B is an acid diffusion control agent capable of inactivating the strong acid by trapping the strong acid generated in the photosensitive resin layer and causing a cleavage reaction.
  • the ether skeleton of the 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring in the structural unit B is an epoxy group and the strong acid generated in the photosensitive resin layer is toluenesulfonic acid, the following reaction can occur).
  • the deactivated strong acid has a weakened acidity, it does not contribute to the deprotection reaction of the structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains the structural unit B, it is possible to suppress the diffusion of the acid generated in the exposed portion to the unexposed portion even when the photosensitive transfer member is left behind after exposure.
  • the cleavage reaction is a slow reaction with a slower reaction rate than the neutralization reaction between the basic compound contained in the photosensitive resin layer and the acid. Therefore, if the content of the structural unit B in the photosensitive resin layer is adjusted to a predetermined amount, the structural unit B unnecessarily deactivates the acid generated from the photoacid generator in the exposed portion at the time of exposure.
  • the photosensitive transfer member does not cause a decrease in the resolution of the pattern due to this (that is, it does not unnecessarily inhibit the deprotection reaction of the structural unit A).
  • the present inventors have attempted to improve the stability of the photosensitive transfer member after exposure by increasing the content of the basic compound in the photosensitive resin layer, but the basic compound It has been found that as the content increases, the sensitivity of the photosensitive resin layer tends to decrease. That is, when the photosensitive resin layer contains a predetermined amount of the structural unit B, a desired effect can be exhibited while achieving good sensitivity.
  • the present inventors have found that when the content of the structural unit B in the photosensitive resin layer is 8.0 ⁇ mol / g or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, the photosensitive transfer member Is, when the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the leaving after exposure is small, and the content of the structural unit B is 700.0 ⁇ mol / g or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, the photosensitive transfer is performed. It has been confirmed that the resolution of the pattern formed by the members is excellent.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of an embodiment of the photosensitive transfer member of the present invention.
  • the photosensitive transfer member 100 shown in FIG. 1 has a structure in which a temporary support 12, a photosensitive resin layer 14, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
  • the photosensitive resin layer 12 contains one or more of the polymer X and the polymer Y and a photoacid generator, and is a 3-membered or 4-membered ether contained in the polymer X and the polymer Y.
  • the content of the structural unit B having a skeleton is 8.0 to 700.0 ⁇ mol / g with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X
  • the photosensitive resin layer further contains a basic compound.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contained in the photosensitive transfer member of the present invention corresponds to the so-called "positive photosensitive resin composition layer", and is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin composition layer. ..
  • the acid generated in response to active radiation catalyzes the deprotection of the protected acid group in the specific polymer.
  • the acid produced by the action of one photon contributes to many deprotection reactions, and the quantum yield exceeds 1, which is a large value such as the power of 10, so-called chemical amplification. As a result of, high sensitivity is obtained.
  • the temporary support is a support that supports the photosensitive resin layer and can be peeled off from the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the temporary support preferably has light transmittance in that the photosensitive resin layer can be exposed through the temporary support when the photosensitive resin layer is pattern-exposed.
  • “having light transmittance” means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more.
  • the transmittance of the main wavelength of the light used for the pattern exposure is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 70% or more in that the exposure sensitivity is more excellent.
  • Examples of the method for measuring the transmittance include a method of measuring using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
  • the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, paper, and the like, and a resin film is preferable because it is more excellent in strength, flexibility, and the like.
  • the resin film include polyethylene terephthalate film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film and the like. Of these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is preferable.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, and is preferably 5 to 200 ⁇ m, and more preferably 10 to 150 ⁇ m in terms of ease of handling and versatility.
  • the thickness of the temporary support depends on the material in terms of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding to a circuit wiring forming substrate, and light transmission required in the first exposure process. Can be selected as appropriate.
  • Preferred embodiments of the provisional support include, for example, paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP2014-85643, paragraphs 0019 to 0026 of JP2016-27363, paragraphs 0041 to 0057 of WO2012 / 08168A1 and WO2018. / 179370A1 Publications are described in paragraphs 0029 to 0040, and the contents of these publications are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains any one or more of polymer X and polymer Y (specific polymer).
  • Polymer X A polymer containing a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group and a structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton.
  • Polymer Y A weight containing a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a structural unit B having a 3- or 4-membered ether skeleton, and a structural unit C having a basic group.
  • the polymer X and the polymer Y differ only in whether or not they contain a structural unit C having a basic group.
  • the "acid group protected by an acid-degradable group” means an acid group protected by a protecting group that decomposes by the action of an acid.
  • the polymer X and the polymer Y include a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group. Therefore, in the polymer X and the polymer Y, the acid group protected by the acid-degradable group undergoes a deprotection reaction to become an acid group due to the action of an acidic substance such as an acid in a catalytic amount generated by exposure. This acid group enables the photosensitive resin layer to be dissolved in a developing solution.
  • an addition polymerization type resin is preferable, and a polymer containing a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof is more preferable.
  • the polymer X and the polymer Y include a structural unit other than the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof, for example, a structural unit derived from a styrene compound, a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, and the like. You may be.
  • the polymer X contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid degradable group.
  • the acid group and the acid-decomposable group known ones can be used and are not particularly limited.
  • the definition of the acid group is as described later, and specifically, a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
  • the acid-degradable group is a group that is relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, an acetal-type protective group such as a 1-alkoxyalkyl group, a tetrahydropyranyl group, and a tetrahydrofuranyl group), the acid can be used. It may be a group that is relatively difficult to decompose (for example, a tertiary alkyl group such as a tert-butyl group and a tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group such as a tert-butyloxycarbonyl group (carbonic acid ester type protective group)). ..
  • the acid-degradable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of acetal (acetal-type acid-degradable group) in that the sensitivity and resolution are more excellent. Further, as the acid group protected by the acid-degradable group, a carboxy group protected by an acetal-type acid-degradable group is preferable in terms of more excellent sensitivity and resolution. Further, the acid-decomposable group is preferably an acid-decomposable group having a molecular weight of 300 or less from the viewpoint of suppressing variation in the line width of the conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
  • the structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group the structural unit represented by the formula A1, the formula A2, or the formula A3 is preferable in that the sensitivity and the resolution are more excellent, and the structural unit A is represented by the formula A3.
  • the structural unit is more preferable.
  • R 11 and R 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. However, at least one of R 11 and R 12 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 13 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 14 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • X 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R 15 represents a substituent.
  • n represents an integer from 0 to 4.
  • R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring.
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. However, at least one of R 21 and R 22 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 23 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 24 is independently a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, or a cycloalkyl group.
  • m represents an integer of 0 to 3.
  • R 21 or R 22 and R 23 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring.
  • R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. However, at least one of R 31 and R 32 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 31 and R 32 is a linear or branched chain having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms). Alternatively, a cyclic alkyl group is preferable.
  • the aryl group represented by R 31 and R 32 a phenyl group is preferable.
  • R 31 and R 32 a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable, respectively.
  • the alkyl and aryl groups represented by R 31 and R 32 may further have a substituent.
  • examples of the alkyl group and the aryl group represented by R 33 include the same alkyl and aryl groups represented by R 31 and R 32 , respectively, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the alkyl group and aryl group represented by R 33 may further have a substituent.
  • R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic ether.
  • the cyclic ether is a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring, and a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring is preferable, and a 5-membered ring is more preferable.
  • the divalent linking group represented by X 0 is not particularly limited, but an arylene group is preferable.
  • the arylene group may further have a substituent.
  • X 0 a single bond is preferable.
  • the structural unit A represented by the above formula A3 is a structural unit having a carboxy group protected by an acetal-type acid-degradable group.
  • the R 34 from the viewpoint of the glass transition temperature of the polymer X (Tg) may be lower and a hydrogen atom is preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit in which R 34 is a hydrogen atom in the formula A3 is 20% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the structural unit A contained in the polymer X. Is preferable.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 34 in the formula A3 is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit A is calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity.
  • R 11 or R 12 and R 13 are connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring in that the sensitivity is more excellent.
  • a cyclic ether a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered cyclic ether is preferable, a tetrahydrofuran ring or a tetrahydropyran ring is more preferable, and a tetrahydrofuran ring is further preferable.
  • R 21 or R 22 and R 23 are connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring in that the sensitivity is more excellent.
  • a cyclic ether a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered cyclic ether is preferable, a tetrahydrofuran ring or a tetrahydropyran ring is more preferable, and a tetrahydrofuran ring is further preferable.
  • R 31 or R 32 and R 33 are connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring in that the sensitivity is more excellent.
  • a cyclic ether a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered cyclic ether is preferable, a tetrahydrofuran ring or a tetrahydropyran ring is more preferable, and a tetrahydrofuran ring is further preferable.
  • the structural unit A contained in the polymer X may be one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit A in the polymer X (when a plurality of types of the structural unit A are contained, the total content thereof) is preferably 10 to 70% by mass, preferably 15 to 50% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer X. % Is more preferable, and 20 to 40% by mass is further preferable. Within the above range, the resolution is further improved.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the polymer X can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • Polymer X comprises a building block B having a 3- or 4-membered ether backbone.
  • Specific examples of the monomer forming the structural unit B having a 3-membered ether skeleton (epoxy group) include glycidyl acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, glycidyl ⁇ -ethyl acrylate, and ⁇ -n-propyl acrylic.
  • Glycidyl acid ⁇ -n-butyl glycidyl acrylate, acrylic acid-3,4-epoxybutyl, methacrylic acid-3,4-epoxybutyl, acrylate-3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl, methacrylic acid-3,4- Epoxycyclohexylmethyl, ⁇ -ethylacrylic acid-3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl, o-vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether, m-vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether, p-vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether, and paragraphs 0031 to paragraphs of Patent No. 4168443.
  • Examples thereof include the compounds containing the alicyclic epoxy skeleton described in 0035, and these contents are incorporated in the present specification.
  • Specific examples of the monomer forming the structural unit B having a 4-membered ether skeleton (oxetanyl group) include the oxetanyl groups described in paragraphs 0011 to 0016 of JP-A-2001-330953 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-330953). Meta) acrylic acid esters and the like, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton is preferably a structural unit having any of the partial structures represented by the following formulas B1 to B3.
  • R b0 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R b0 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4.
  • the alkyl group is preferably linear or branched. Further, the above alkyl group may further have a substituent.
  • the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton is more preferably any of the structural units represented by the following formulas B11 to B13.
  • R b1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • the structural unit B contained in the polymer X may be one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit B in the polymer X (when a plurality of types of the structural unit B are contained, the total content thereof) is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer X. 1 to 15% by mass is more preferable, and 0.1 to 10% by mass is further preferable.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the polymer X can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the polymer X may contain other structural units. In the following, other structural units that the polymer X may contain will be described.
  • -Constituent unit D having an acid group The polymer X may contain a structural unit D having an acid group (hereinafter, also referred to as “constituent unit D”).
  • the structural unit D is a structural unit having an acid group that is not protected by an acid-degradable group, that is, an acid group that does not have a protecting group.
  • the acid group in the present specification means a proton dissociative group having a pKa of 12 or less.
  • the pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less, from the viewpoint of improving sensitivity.
  • the lower limit of pKa of the acid group is preferably ⁇ 5 or higher.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a sulfonylimide group and the like. Of these, a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
  • the structural unit D contained in the polymer X may be only one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit D in the polymer X (if a plurality of types of the structural unit D are contained, the total content thereof) is, for example, the total mass of the polymer X. , 0.1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 10% by mass or less, preferably 1.0% by mass or less.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit D in the polymer X can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the polymer X is a structural unit A other than the above-mentioned structural unit A, structural unit B, and structural unit D (hereinafter, also referred to as “constituent unit E”.
  • the structural unit E is a structural unit C (described later). It does not include), which corresponds to the structural unit contained in the polymer Y).
  • the monomer forming the structural unit E is not particularly limited, and for example, styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid.
  • the constituent unit E includes styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinyl benzoate, ethyl vinyl benzoate, methyl (meth) acrylate, and (meth).
  • a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of further improving adhesion, and a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is preferable. Is more preferable. Specific examples thereof include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the structural unit E contained in the polymer X may be only one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit E in the polymer X (if a plurality of structural units E are contained, the total content thereof) is 90 with respect to the total mass of the polymer X. It is preferably mass% or less, more preferably 85% by mass or less, and even more preferably 80% by mass or less. As the lower limit value, 10% by mass or more is preferable, and 20% by mass or more is more preferable. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit E in the polymer X can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the polymer Y contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group.
  • the structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group has the same meaning as the structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group contained in the polymer X described above, and has a preferred embodiment. It is the same.
  • the structural unit A contained in the polymer Y may be one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit A in the polymer Y (when a plurality of types of the structural unit A are contained, the total content thereof) is preferably 10 to 70% by mass, preferably 15 to 50% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer Y. % Is more preferable, and 20 to 40% by mass is further preferable. Within the above range, the resolution is further improved.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the polymer Y can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • Polymer Y comprises a building block B having a 3- or 4-membered ether skeleton.
  • the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton is synonymous with the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton contained in the polymer X described above, and has a preferred embodiment. It is the same.
  • the structural unit B contained in the polymer Y may be one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit B in the polymer Y (when a plurality of types of the structural unit B are contained, the total content thereof) is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer Y. 1 to 15% by mass is more preferable, and 0.1 to 10% by mass is further preferable.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the polymer Y can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the polymer Y contains a structural unit C having a basic group.
  • the basic group include groups having a nitrogen atom such as an aliphatic amino group, an aromatic amino group, and a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group, and an aliphatic amino group is preferable.
  • the aliphatic amino group may be any of a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, and a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoint of resolvability, it may be a secondary amino group or a tertiary amino group. A secondary amino group is preferred.
  • the monomer forming a structural unit having a basic group examples include 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, and acrylic methacrylic acid.
  • the structural unit C contained in the polymer Y may be only one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit C in the polymer Y (when a plurality of types of the structural unit C are contained, the total content thereof) is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer Y. 01 to 5% by mass is more preferable.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit C in the polymer Y can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from the 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the polymer Y may contain other structural units. In the following, other structural units that the polymer Y may contain will be described.
  • -Constituent unit D having an acid group The polymer Y may contain a structural unit D having an acid group.
  • the structural unit D having an acid group has the same meaning as the structural unit D having an acid group contained in the polymer X described above, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • the content of the structural unit D in the polymer Y (if a plurality of types of the structural unit D are contained, the total content thereof) is, for example, the total mass of the polymer Y. , 0.1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 10% by mass or less, preferably 1.0% by mass or less.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit D in the polymer Y can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the polymer Y may include the above-mentioned structural unit A, the structural unit B, the structural unit C, and other structural units E other than the structural unit D.
  • the structural unit E has the same meaning as the structural unit E contained in the polymer X described above, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
  • the structural unit E contained in the polymer Y may be only one type or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit E in the polymer Y (or the total content when a plurality of types of the structural units E are contained) is 90 with respect to the total mass of the polymer Y. It is preferably mass% or less, more preferably 85% by mass or less, and even more preferably 80% by mass or less. As the lower limit value, 10% by mass or more is preferable, and 20% by mass or more is more preferable. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved.
  • the content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit E in the polymer Y can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably a polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight of 60,000 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, more preferably 3,000 to 50,000, and particularly preferably 10,000 to 40,000 from the viewpoint of suppressing the development residue.
  • the ratio (dispersity) of the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
  • the specific polymer can be synthesized by a known method.
  • the content of the structural unit B having the ether skeleton of the 3-membered ring or the 4-membered ring is 8.0 ⁇ mol / g or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, and after exposure. 12.0 ⁇ mol / g or more is preferable in that the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement is smaller.
  • the upper limit thereof is 700.0 ⁇ mol / g or less, and 480.0 ⁇ mol / g or less is preferable in that the resolution of the formed pattern is more excellent.
  • the content of the structural unit B having the ether skeleton of the 3-membered ring or the 4-membered ring means the total content ( ⁇ mol) of the structural unit B contained in the photosensitive resin layer (g).
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains only one of the polymer X and the polymer Y, it means the content of the structural unit B in the contained polymer, and the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X and the polymer Y.
  • both of the above are included, it means the total content of the structural unit B in the polymer X and the structural unit B in the polymer Y.
  • the total content of the structural unit C having a basic group and the basic compound described later in the photosensitive resin layer is more excellent in the resolution of the formed pattern with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • 3.0 ⁇ mol / g or more is preferable, and 10.0 ⁇ mol / g or more is more preferable.
  • the upper limit value 100.0 ⁇ mol / g or less is preferable, and 60.0 ⁇ mol / g or less is more preferable, because the sensitivity is more excellent.
  • the photosensitive resin layer has a small content of a polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group and a low molecular weight compound having an acid group described later. This is because these components unnecessarily react with the 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring epoxy skeleton in the structural unit B contained in the polymer X and the polymer Y.
  • the reaction with the 3-membered ring or 4-membered cyclic epoxy skeleton in the structural unit B contained in the polymer X and the polymer Y can be suppressed.
  • the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement after exposure can be made smaller.
  • the total content of the structural unit having an acid group and the low molecular weight compound having an acid group described later in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 100.0 ⁇ mol / g or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. ..
  • the content of the structural unit having an acid group means the total content ( ⁇ mol) of the structural unit contained in the photosensitive resin layer (g).
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains one kind of polymer having the above-mentioned structural unit, it means the content of the structural unit having an acid group contained in the above-mentioned polymer.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains a plurality of types of polymers having the above-mentioned structural units, it means the total content of the structural units having an acid group contained in the above-mentioned plurality of types of polymers. Further, when calculating the total content of the low molecular weight compound having an acid group and the structural unit having an acid group contained in the polymer containing the structural unit having an acid group, the low molecular weight compound having an acid group When one of the above-mentioned structural units having an acid group contained in the polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group is not contained, the amount of the component not contained is calculated as 0. Further, when the above-mentioned specific polymer contains a structural unit D having an acid group, this specific polymer corresponds to "a polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group".
  • the photosensitive resin layer may further contain other polymers other than the specific polymer.
  • the content of the other polymers is preferably 50% by mass or less, preferably 30% by mass or less, based on the total content of the specific polymer and the other polymers. Is more preferable, and 20% by mass or less is further preferable.
  • other polymers include polyhydroxystyrene. Commercially available products of polyhydroxystyrene include SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (all manufactured by Sartmer), ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC.
  • the specific polymer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the specific polymer in the photosensitive resin layer (the total content when a plurality of types are contained) is 70% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer in that the sensitivity and resolution are more excellent. Is preferable, and 80% by mass or more is more preferable in that the resolution of the formed pattern is more excellent.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 99% by mass or less is preferable, and 98% by mass or less is more preferable.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains a photoacid generator.
  • the photoacid generator is a compound capable of generating an acid by irradiation with active rays such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and electron beams.
  • active rays such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and electron beams.
  • a compound that is sensitive to active light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more (preferably a wavelength of 300 to 450 nm) and generates an acid is preferable, but its chemical structure is not limited.
  • a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to active light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that is sensitive to active light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer.
  • a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less is preferable, a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less is more preferable, and a light that generates an acid having a pKa of 2 or less is preferable. Acid generators are more preferred.
  • the lower limit of pKa is not particularly limited, but is preferably -10.0 or higher, for example.
  • the photoacid generator is a photoacid generator that generates an alkyl sulfonic acid having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and / or an aryl sulfonic acid in that the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to leaving after exposure is smaller. It is preferable to include a photoacid generator that is generated.
  • the photoacid generator may be either an ionic photoacid generator or a nonionic photoacid generator.
  • the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are more preferable. Further, as the ionic photoacid generator, the ionic photoacid generator described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-085643 is also preferable.
  • nonionic photoacid generator examples include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, oxime sulfonate compounds and the like.
  • the oxime sulfonate compound is preferable in that it is more excellent in sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion.
  • trichloromethyl-s-triazines examples include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP2011-221494.
  • oxime sulfonate compound examples include the compounds described in paragraphs 0084 to 0088 of International Publication No. 2018/179640.
  • the photoacid generator one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of onium salt compounds and oxime sulfonate compounds are preferable, and oxime sulfonate compounds are more preferable, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution. Further, as the photoacid generator, a photoacid generator having the following structure is also preferable.
  • the photoacid generator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the photoacid generator in the photosensitive resin layer (the total content when a plurality of types are contained) is 0.1 with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer in that the sensitivity and resolution are more excellent. It is preferably from 10% by mass, more preferably from 0.5 to 5% by mass.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains a basic compound.
  • the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer Y
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain a basic compound.
  • the basic compound does not include the above-mentioned polymer.
  • the molecular weight of the basic compound is preferably 2,000 or less, more preferably 1,000 or less, further preferably 500 or less, and particularly preferably 400 or less.
  • an arbitrary selection can be used from the basic compounds used in the chemically amplified resist, and for example, aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and carboxylic acids can be used.
  • Examples include quaternary ammonium salts of acids. Specific examples of these include the compounds described in paragraphs 0204 to 0207 of JP-A-2011-22149, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification.
  • Examples of the aliphatic amine include trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine and dicyclohexylamine. , And dicyclohexylmethylamine and the like.
  • Examples of the aromatic amine include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, diphenylamine and the like.
  • heterocyclic amine examples include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, and the like.
  • CMTU N-cyclohexyl-N'-[2- (4-morpholinyl) ethyl] thiourea
  • the basic compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the basic compound is as described above.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain a low molecular weight compound having an acid group.
  • the low molecular weight compound having an acid group is intended to be a non-polymer having no repeating unit, and does not include the above-mentioned polymer.
  • the low molecular weight compound having an acid group is preferably 2,000 or less, more preferably 1,000 or less, further preferably 500 or less, and particularly preferably 400 or less.
  • the acid group means a proton dissociative group having a pKa of 12 or less.
  • the definition of the acid group is as described above, and specific examples thereof include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group.
  • Examples of the low molecular weight compound having an acid group include benzoic acid and the like.
  • the low molecular weight compound having an acid group may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the low molecular weight compound having an acid group is as described above.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain other additives, if necessary.
  • other additives include surfactants, plasticizers, sensitizers, heterocyclic compounds, alkoxysilane compounds and the like, and surfactants are preferable from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
  • surfactant examples include anionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, nonionic (nonionic) surfactants, and amphoteric surfactants, and nonionic surfactants are preferable.
  • nonionic surfactant examples include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkylphenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene glycol higher fatty acid diesters, silicone-based surfactants, and fluorine-based surfactants. Can be mentioned.
  • the surfactant for example, the surfactant described in paragraphs 0120 to 0125 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can also be used. Further, as commercially available surfactants, for example, Megafuck F-552 and F-554 (all manufactured by DIC Corporation) can also be used. Further, as the surfactant, the surfactants described in paragraphs 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraphs 0060 to 0071 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-237362 can also be used.
  • the surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the surfactant in the photosensitive resin layer (the total content when a plurality of types are contained) is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01, based on the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. ⁇ 3% by mass is more preferable.
  • plasticizer examples include those described in paragraphs 097 to 0119 of International Publication No. 2018/179640.
  • the photosensitive resin layer may contain a solvent.
  • the solvent may remain.
  • the content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 2% by mass or less, further preferably 1% by mass or less, and 0.5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. Is particularly preferable, and 0.1% by mass or less is most preferable.
  • the photosensitive resin layer has other additives such as a rust preventive, a metal oxide particle, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid growth agent, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, and a thermal radical polymerization initiator.
  • additives such as a rust preventive, a metal oxide particle, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid growth agent, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, and a thermal radical polymerization initiator.
  • Thermoacid generators, UV absorbers, thickeners, cross-linking agents, and known additives such as organic or inorganic precipitation inhibitors may be further included. Preferred embodiments of these components are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP2014-85643, respectively, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.5 to 20 ⁇ m. When the average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is 20 ⁇ m or less, the resolution of the pattern is more excellent, and when the average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is 0.5 ⁇ m or more, the pattern linearity is preferable.
  • the average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is more preferably 0.8 to 15 ⁇ m, still more preferably 1.0 to 10 ⁇ m.
  • the average thickness of each layer in the photosensitive transfer member shall be measured by observing a cross section in a direction perpendicular to the surface direction of the transfer member with a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The average thickness is an average value when the thickness is measured at 10 points or more.
  • the photosensitive resin layer can be formed by preparing a photosensitive resin composition containing a component used for forming the photosensitive resin layer and a solvent, and applying and drying the photosensitive resin composition. It is also possible to prepare a composition by preparing a solution in which each component is previously dissolved in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above is preferably filtered using, for example, a filter having a pore size of 0.2 to 30 ⁇ m.
  • a photosensitive resin layer can be formed by applying the photosensitive resin composition on a temporary support or a cover film and drying it.
  • the coating method is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known methods such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating. Further, when the other layer described later is formed on the temporary support or the cover film, the photosensitive resin layer may be formed on the other layer.
  • the photosensitive resin composition preferably contains a component used for forming the photosensitive resin layer and a solvent.
  • a photosensitive resin layer can be suitably formed by mixing each component and a solvent, adjusting the viscosity, applying and drying.
  • the components used for forming the photosensitive resin layer are as described above.
  • the solvent a known solvent can be used, and for example, the solvent described in paragraphs 0092 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be used.
  • the solvent having a vapor pressure of 1 kPa to 16 kPa at 20 ° C. described in paragraph 0014 of JP-A-2018-1778889 can also be preferably used.
  • the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the solvent when the photosensitive resin composition is applied is preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. ..
  • the photosensitive transfer member may include other layers (hereinafter, also referred to as “other layers”) other than the above-mentioned photosensitive resin layer.
  • other layers include a contrast enhancement layer, an intermediate layer, a cover film, a thermoplastic resin layer, and the like, and known ones can be appropriately adopted.
  • the method for producing the photosensitive transfer member is not particularly limited, and a known production method can be applied.
  • the method for producing the photosensitive transfer member preferably includes a step of forming a photosensitive resin layer by applying and drying the photosensitive resin composition on the temporary support, and a step of forming the photosensitive resin layer. After that, it is more preferable to further include a step of arranging the cover film on the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the method for producing the resin pattern of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is the method for producing the resin pattern using the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member, but the method is different from that of the temporary support side of the photosensitive resin layer in the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member.
  • Is a step of bringing the surface on the opposite side into contact with the substrate and bonding the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate hereinafter, also referred to as “bonding step”, and this bonding is also referred to as “transfer” or "lamination”).
  • a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter, also referred to as “exposure step”) and a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as “development step”). It is preferable to include (referred to) and in this order.
  • the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it includes the method using the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member, but the side opposite to the temporary support side of the photosensitive resin layer in the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member.
  • the step of bringing the surface of the above into contact with the conductive layer in the substrate having the conductive layer and bonding the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate having the conductive layer (bonding step), and the above-mentioned above in the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member which has been bonded.
  • the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention has a mode in which the four steps of the bonding step, the exposure step, the developing step, and the etching step are repeated a plurality of times as one set.
  • the photosensitive resin layer is a positive photosensitive resin layer that leaves a portion not irradiated with active light as an image.
  • a photosensitizer that generates acid by being irradiated with active light is used to increase the solubility of the exposed part. If none of the parts are cured and the obtained pattern shape is defective, the substrate can be reused (reworked) by full exposure or the like.
  • International Publication No. 2006/190405 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the method for manufacturing a resin pattern of the present invention and the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring of the present invention have a substrate or a conductive layer on the surface of the photosensitive resin layer in the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member opposite to the temporary support side. It is preferable to include a step (bonding step) of bringing the photosensitive transfer member into contact with the conductive layer of the substrate and bonding the substrate or the substrate having the conductive layer. In the bonding step, it is preferable that the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate or the substrate having the conductive layer are pressure-bonded so as to be in contact with each other.
  • the patterned photosensitive resin layer after exposure and development can be suitably used as an etching resist when etching the conductive layer.
  • the method of crimping the substrate or the substrate having the conductive layer with the photosensitive transfer member is not particularly limited, and a known transfer method and laminating method can be applied.
  • the bonding is preferably performed by pressurizing and heating with a roll or the like.
  • a known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator can be used for bonding.
  • the roll-to-roll method will be described below.
  • the roll-to-roll method uses a substrate that can be wound and unwound as a substrate, and winds the substrate or a structure including the substrate before any of the steps included in the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention. At least one of a step of unwinding (also referred to as “unwinding step”) and a step of winding up the substrate or a structure including the substrate (also referred to as “winding step”) after any of the steps. (Preferably, all steps or all steps other than the heating step) are performed while transporting the substrate or the structure including the substrate.
  • the unwinding method in the unwinding step and the winding method in the winding step are not particularly limited, and a known method may be used in the manufacturing method to which the roll-to-roll method is applied.
  • substrate A a glass substrate, a silicon substrate, and a resin film are preferable.
  • the substrate A and the substrate B are preferably transparent.
  • the refractive index of the substrate A and the substrate B is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
  • the substrate A and the substrate B may be made of a translucent substrate such as a glass substrate, and for example, tempered glass typified by Corning's gorilla glass can also be used.
  • the materials used in JP-A-2010-086644, JP-A-2010-152809, and JP-A-2010-257492 are also preferable.
  • a resin film base material is used as the substrate A and the substrate B, it is more preferable to use a resin film having a small optical distortion and / or a high transparency.
  • Specific materials include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose, cycloolefin polymer and the like.
  • a resin film is preferable from the viewpoint of being manufactured by a roll-to-roll method.
  • the conductive layer examples include any conductive layer used for general circuit wiring or touch panel wiring.
  • the conductive layer one or more layers selected from the group consisting of a metal layer, a conductive metal oxide layer, a graphene layer, a carbon nanotube layer, and a conductive polymer layer are preferable from the viewpoint of conductivity and fine wire forming property.
  • a metal layer is more preferable, and a copper layer or a silver layer is further preferable.
  • the conductive layer arranged on the substrate B may be one layer or two or more layers. When two or more conductive layers are arranged, it is preferable that the conductive layers are made of different materials. Examples of the material of the conductive layer include a single metal and a conductive metal oxide.
  • Examples of the metal simple substance include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, Mo, Ag, and Au.
  • Examples of the conductive metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), SiO 2 and the like. “Conductivity” means that the volume resistivity is less than 1 ⁇ 10 6 ⁇ cm, and the volume resistivity is preferably less than 1 ⁇ 10 4 ⁇ cm.
  • the electrode pattern corresponds to the sensor of the visual recognition portion used in the capacitive touch panel or the wiring of the peripheral extraction portion.
  • the method for producing a resin pattern of the present invention and the method for producing a circuit wiring of the present invention preferably include a step (exposure step) of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer after the bonding step.
  • the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited. At least the pattern can be made from the viewpoint that the display quality of a display device (for example, a touch panel) provided with an input device having a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method of the present invention can be improved and the area occupied by the take-out wiring can be as small as possible.
  • a part is preferably a thin wire of 100 ⁇ m or less, and more preferably 70 ⁇ m or less.
  • the light source used for exposure can be appropriately selected as long as the photosensitive resin layer irradiates light in a wavelength range that can be exposed (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.). Specific examples thereof include ultra-high pressure mercury lamps, high pressure mercury lamps, metal halide lamps, and LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes).
  • the exposure amount is preferably 5 ⁇ 200mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10 ⁇ 100mJ / cm 2.
  • the temporary support may be peeled off from the photosensitive resin layer and then the pattern exposure may be performed. Before the temporary support is peeled off, the pattern is exposed through the temporary support, and then the temporary support is peeled off. You may. In order to prevent mask contamination due to contact between the photosensitive resin layer and the mask and to avoid the influence of foreign matter adhering to the mask on the exposure, it is preferable to perform pattern exposure without peeling off the temporary support.
  • the pattern exposure may be an exposure through a mask or a direct exposure using a laser or the like.
  • the method for producing a resin pattern of the present invention and the method for producing a circuit wiring of the present invention may include a step (development step) of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern after the exposure step. preferable.
  • the exposed photosensitive resin layer in the developing step can be developed by using a developing solution.
  • the developing solution is not particularly limited as long as the non-image portion of the photosensitive resin layer can be removed, and a known developing solution such as the developing solution described in JP-A-5-07724 can be used.
  • the developer is preferably a developer in which the exposed portion (positive type) of the photosensitive resin layer has a dissolution type development behavior.
  • the developer may further contain a water-soluble organic solvent, a surfactant and the like.
  • the developing solution for example, the developing solution described in paragraph 0194 of International Publication No. 2015/093271 is preferable.
  • the development method is not particularly limited, and any of paddle development, shower development, spin development, dip development, etc. may be used.
  • the shower development will be described.
  • the exposed portion can be removed.
  • a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rub with a brush or the like to remove the development residue.
  • the liquid temperature of the developing solution is preferably 20 to 40 ° C.
  • the method for producing a resin pattern of the present invention and the method for producing a circuit wiring of the present invention may further include a post-baking step of heat-treating a pattern containing a photosensitive resin layer obtained by development.
  • Post-baking is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably performed in an environment of 50.66 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferably performed in an environment of 111.46 kPa or less, and further preferably performed in an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
  • the temperature of the post-bake is preferably 80 to 250 ° C, more preferably 110 to 170 ° C, and even more preferably 130 to 150 ° C.
  • the post-baking time is preferably 1 to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 to 10 minutes, still more preferably 2 to 4 minutes. Post-baking may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
  • circuit wiring manufacturing method of the present invention may include other steps such as a post-exposure step before the etching step described later.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method of the present invention preferably includes a step (etching step) of etching the conductive layer in the region where the resin pattern is not arranged.
  • the pattern formed from the photosensitive resin layer by the developing step is used as an etching resist, and the conductive layer is etched.
  • a method of etching treatment a method by wet etching described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP-A-2010-152155, a method by dry etching such as known plasma etching, and the like can be applied.
  • etching treatment a generally used wet etching method of immersing in an etching solution can be mentioned.
  • an acidic type or alkaline type etching solution may be appropriately selected according to the etching target.
  • the acidic type etching solution include an aqueous solution of an acidic component alone such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid, and phosphoric acid, and an acidic component and a salt such as ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, or potassium permanganate.
  • a mixed aqueous solution and the like are exemplified.
  • the acidic component a component in which a plurality of acidic components are combined may be used.
  • the alkaline type etching solution an aqueous solution of an alkaline component alone such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, an organic amine, and a salt of an organic amine such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, and an alkaline component and potassium permanganate A mixed aqueous solution with a salt such as, etc. is exemplified.
  • the alkaline component a component in which a plurality of alkaline components are combined may be used.
  • the temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or lower.
  • the resin pattern used as an etching mask preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. .. Therefore, the photosensitive resin layer is prevented from peeling off during the etching step, and the portion where the photosensitive resin layer does not exist is selectively etched.
  • a cleaning step of cleaning the etched substrate and a drying step of drying the cleaned substrate may be performed, if necessary.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method of the present invention preferably includes a step (removal step) of removing the resin pattern.
  • the removing step is not particularly limited and can be performed as needed, but it is preferably performed after the etching step.
  • the method for removing the remaining resin pattern is not particularly limited, but examples thereof include a method for removing by chemical treatment, and a method using a removing liquid is preferable. Examples of the method for removing the resin pattern include a method of immersing the substrate having the resin pattern in the removing liquid being stirred at 30 to 80 ° C. (preferably 50 to 80 ° C.) for 1 to 30 minutes.
  • the removing solution examples include a removing solution in which an inorganic alkaline component or an organic alkaline component is dissolved in water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or a mixed solution thereof.
  • examples of the inorganic alkaline component include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide and the like.
  • examples of the organic alkali component include a primary amine compound, a secondary amine compound, a tertiary amine compound, and a quaternary ammonium salt compound.
  • the removing liquid may be used and removed by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method or the like.
  • [Full exposure process of resin pattern] Prior to the removal step, it is preferable to include a step of exposing the entire surface of the resin pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as a "full exposure step”). Further, if necessary, a step of heating the resin pattern exposed to the entire surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “heating step”) may be included.
  • the full exposure step and the heating step are preferably performed after the etching step and before the removing step.
  • the light source used for exposure in the full exposure process is not particularly limited, and a known exposure light source can be used. From the viewpoint of removability, it is preferable to use a light source containing light having the same wavelength as that in the exposure step.
  • the exposure amount in the overall exposure step from the viewpoint of removability, preferably 5 ⁇ 1,000mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10 ⁇ 800mJ / cm 2, more preferably 100 ⁇ 500mJ / cm 2.
  • the exposure amount in the entire surface exposure step is preferably equal to or more than the exposure amount in the above exposure step, and more preferably larger than the exposure amount in the above exposure step.
  • the circuit wiring manufacturing method of the present invention may include any steps (other steps) other than those described above. For example, the following steps can be mentioned, but the steps are not limited to these steps. Further, as an example of the exposure step, the developing step, and other steps that can be included in the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention, the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-023696 are also preferably used. Can be done.
  • the method for producing a resin pattern of the present invention and the method for producing a circuit wiring of the present invention are a step of peeling the cover film of the photosensitive transfer member when the photosensitive transfer member has a cover film (hereinafter, “cover film peeling step”). It is also preferable to include.).
  • the method for peeling the cover film is not particularly limited, and a known method can be applied.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring of the present invention may include a step of reducing the visible light reflectance of a part or all of a plurality of conductive layers on a substrate.
  • the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment.
  • the visible light reflectance of the conductive layer can be reduced by blackening the copper by oxidizing it to obtain copper oxide.
  • Preferable embodiments of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance are described in paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-150118, and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-206315. There is a description, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring of the present invention preferably includes a step of forming an insulating film on the formed circuit wiring and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film.
  • a second conductive pattern can be further formed by performing the four steps of the bonding step, the exposure step, the developing step, and the etching step again on the new conductive layer. That is, with such a configuration, the second conductive pattern can be formed on the substrate while being insulated from the first conductive pattern.
  • the procedure of the step of forming the insulating film is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a known method of forming a permanent film.
  • an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having an insulating property.
  • the procedure of the process of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film is not particularly limited.
  • a new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
  • a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces it is also preferable to use a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces and to form circuits sequentially or simultaneously on the conductive layers formed on both surfaces.
  • a touch panel circuit wiring having a first conductive pattern formed on one surface of the substrate and a second conductive pattern formed on the other surface can be formed. It is also preferable to form the touch panel circuit wiring having such a configuration from both sides of the base material by roll-to-roll.
  • the circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention can be applied to various devices.
  • Examples of the device provided with the circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention include an input device and the like, and a touch panel is preferable, and a capacitance type touch panel is more preferable.
  • the input device can also be applied to display devices such as organic EL display devices and liquid crystal display devices.
  • the method for manufacturing the touch panel of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it includes the method using the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member, but is on the side opposite to the temporary support side of the photosensitive resin layer in the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member.
  • a step of bringing the surface into contact with the conductive layer in the substrate having the conductive layer to bond the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate having the conductive layer (bonding step), and a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer (the step of pattern exposure).
  • the touch panel manufacturing method of the present invention specific aspects of each step and embodiments such as the order in which each step is performed are as described in the above-mentioned "Circuit wiring manufacturing method", which is a preferable embodiment. Is the same.
  • a method for manufacturing a touch panel of the present invention a known method for manufacturing a touch panel can be referred to for configurations other than those described above. Further, the method for manufacturing a touch panel of the present invention may include an arbitrary step (other steps) other than the above-mentioned steps.
  • FIG. 2 and 3 show an example of a mask pattern used in the method for manufacturing a touch panel of the present invention.
  • SL and G are non-image parts (light-shielding parts)
  • DL is a virtual representation of the alignment frame.
  • the method for manufacturing a touch panel of the present invention for example, by exposing the photosensitive resin layer through a mask having the pattern A shown in FIG. 2, a circuit wiring having the pattern A corresponding to SL and G was formed.
  • Can manufacture touch panels for Specifically, it can be produced by the method shown in FIG. 1 of International Publication No. 2016/190405.
  • G is a portion where a transparent electrode (touch panel electrode) is formed
  • SL is a portion where wiring of a peripheral take-out portion is formed.
  • the touch panel manufactured by the method for manufacturing a touch panel of the present invention preferably has a transparent substrate, electrodes, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
  • the detection method on the touch panel may be any known method such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method. Of these, the capacitance method is preferable.
  • the touch panel type includes a so-called in-cell type (for example, those shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of JP-A-2012-517501), a so-called on-cell type (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-168125). The one described in FIG. 19 of the publication, the one described in FIGS.
  • Table 1 shows the types of monomers constituting the polymers A-1 to A-19.
  • the content of each monomer is intended to be mass%.
  • the "ether value ( ⁇ mol / g)” represents the content ( ⁇ mol / g) of the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the polymer.
  • the "amine value ( ⁇ mol / g)” represents the content ( ⁇ mol / g) of the structural unit C having a basic group in the polymer.
  • the "acid value ( ⁇ mol / g)” represents the content ( ⁇ mol / g) of the structural unit D having an acid group in the polymer.
  • THF 2-Tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate
  • MAEVE 1-ethoxyethyl methacrylate (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • MATHP Tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-ylmethacrylate (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • MATTH 2-Tetrahydrofuranyl methacrylate (the one synthesized by the synthesis method described later (Synthesis Example 2) was used.
  • AA Acrylic acid (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • GMA Glycidyl methacrylate (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • OXE-30 (3-ethyloxetane-3-yl) methyl methacrylate (manufactured by
  • Synthesis example 2 MATTH synthesis method >> Tetrahydrofuran methacrylate (MATHV) by the same method as in Synthesis Example 1 described above, except that acrylic acid (72.1 g, 1.0 mol) was changed to methacrylic acid (86.1 g, 1.0 mol). ) was synthesized.
  • Polymers A-2 to A-19 were also synthesized by the same method as polymer A-1, except that the monomer species shown in Table 1 were changed. Also in the synthesis of the polymers A-2 to A-19, the solid content concentration of the polymer was set to 40% by mass.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymers A-2 to A-19 was in the range of 19,000 to 31,000 in terms of polystyrene by the GPC method. Table 1 shows the weight average molecular weights of the polymers A-2 to A-19.
  • B-1 A photoacid generator having the following structure (synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0227 of JP2013-047765A).
  • B-2 PAG103 (trade name, manufactured by BASF: photoacid generator with the following structure)
  • GSID-26-1 (trade name, manufactured by BASF: a photoacid generator having the following structure)
  • the low molecular weight compounds having an acid group shown in Table 2 are as follows. Benzoic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • the obtained photosensitive resin composition was placed on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 30 ⁇ m as a temporary support using a slit-shaped nozzle to obtain a dry film thickness of 3.0 ⁇ m and a coating width of 1.0 m. It was applied so as to become. Then, it was passed through a drying zone at 80 ° C. for 40 seconds, and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N manufactured by Tredegar) was pressure-bonded as a cover film to prepare a photosensitive transfer member.
  • the total light haze of the PET film was 0.19%.
  • a haze meter HZ-2 manufactured by Suga Test Instruments Co., Ltd. was used, and the total light haze value (%) of the base small piece was measured according to JIS-K-7136.
  • a PET substrate with a copper layer prepared by laminating a copper layer having a thickness of 500 nm on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 188 ⁇ m was used.
  • the temporary support was peeled off and developed. Development was carried out by shower development for 30 seconds using a 1.0% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 25 ° C.
  • the line width of the obtained line-and-space pattern was observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM), and the variation of the line width from 10 ⁇ m was evaluated based on the following evaluation criteria. In practice, it is preferable that the evaluation is "3" or more (that is, the fluctuation of the line width from 10 ⁇ m is less than 1.5 ⁇ m).
  • the prepared photosensitive transfer member was subjected to a roll temperature of 120 ° C., a linear pressure of 0.8 MPa, and a linear velocity of 1.0 m / min. It was laminated on the PET substrate with a copper layer described above under the above-mentioned laminating conditions. At that time, the cover film was peeled off, and lamination was performed so that the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member was in contact with the copper layer. After exposure with an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp via a line-and-space pattern mask (duty ratio 1: 1) with a line width of 3 to 20 ⁇ m without peeling the temporary support, the temporary support is peeled off and developed after being left for 2 hours. did.
  • the “content in the polymer” is the content of the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the polymer. Represents an amount ( ⁇ mol / g). Further, the “content in the photosensitive resin layer” represents the content ( ⁇ mol / g) of the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
  • the “content in the polymer” refers to the content ( ⁇ mol / g) of the structural unit C having a basic group in the polymer.
  • the “content in the photosensitive resin layer” is the content ( ⁇ mol / g) of the structural unit C having a basic group and the content ( ⁇ mol / g) of the basic compound with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. Represents the total content of.
  • the “acid value ( ⁇ mol / g)” column in Table 2 the “content in the polymer” represents the content ( ⁇ mol / g) of the structural unit D having an acid group in the polymer. ..
  • the "content in the photosensitive resin layer” is the content ( ⁇ mol / g) of the structural unit D having an acid group and the low molecular weight compound (benzoic acid) having an acid group with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. Represents the total content of the content ( ⁇ mol / g).
  • the "ratio (%) of the polymer to the solid content” in the “polymer column” is the total solid content constituting the photosensitive resin layer (the solid content is the photosensitive resin layer). It is intended as a component and does not contain a solvent.
  • the component forms a photosensitive resin layer, even if the property is liquid, it is regarded as a solid content) with respect to the total content of the polymer ( Mass%) is intended.
  • the "ratio of the polymer to the solid content (%)" and the content of the polymer (mass%) with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer were substantially the same.
  • the photosensitive transfer member of the example is excellent in both the resolution of the formed pattern and the suppression of the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement after exposure (detention time dependence (PED)). It is clear that. From the results of Examples 1 to 18, the content of the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the photosensitive resin layer is 12.0 ⁇ mol / mol / relative to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. When it is g or more, the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement after exposure is smaller, and when it is 480.0 ⁇ mol / g or less, it can be confirmed that the resolution is more excellent.
  • the total content of the structural unit C having a basic group and the basic compound described later in the photosensitive resin layer is 10.0 ⁇ mol / mol / relative to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. It can be confirmed that when it is g or more, the resolution is more excellent, and when it is 60.0 ⁇ mol / g or less, the sensitivity is more excellent. From the results of Examples 1 to 18, when the content of the structural unit D having an acid group in the photosensitive resin layer is 100.0 ⁇ mol / g or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, after exposure. It can be confirmed that the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement of is less. From the results of Examples 1 to 18, when the content of the specific polymer in the photosensitive resin layer is 80% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, the resolution of the formed pattern Can be confirmed to be superior.
  • Example 101 (second time: PET peeling exposure)] On a 100-micron thick PET substrate, ITO was formed as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was formed as a first layer of a conductive layer by a vacuum deposition method to a thickness of 200 nm. Then, it was used as a circuit forming substrate.
  • the photosensitive transfer member obtained in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (Lamiroll temperature 120 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 1.0 m / min.). At that time, the cover film was peeled off, and lamination was performed so that the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member was in contact with the copper layer.
  • the contact pattern was exposed using a photomask provided with the pattern A shown in FIG. 2, which had a structure in which the conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Then, the temporary support was peeled off, developed, and washed with water to obtain pattern A. Next, the copper layer is etched with a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and then the ITO layer is etched with an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.). A substrate in which both copper and ITO were drawn in pattern A was obtained. Next, the pattern was exposed using a photomask provided with the opening of the pattern B shown in FIG.
  • Example 102 (second time: exposure through PET)] On a 100-micron thick PET substrate, ITO was formed as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was formed as a first layer of a conductive layer by a vacuum deposition method to a thickness of 200 nm. Then, it was used as a circuit forming substrate.
  • the photosensitive transfer member obtained in Example 1 was unwound and laminated on a copper layer (roll temperature 120 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 1.0 m / min.). At that time, the cover film was peeled off, and lamination was performed so that the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member was in contact with the copper layer.
  • the pattern was exposed using a photomask provided with the pattern A shown in FIG. 2, which had a structure in which the conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Then, the temporary support was peeled off, developed, and washed with water to obtain pattern A. Next, the copper layer is etched with a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and then the ITO layer is etched with an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.). A substrate in which both copper and ITO were drawn in pattern A was obtained.
  • Cu-02 copper etching solution
  • ITO-02 ITO etching solution
  • PET (A) (a PET film having a thickness of 30 ⁇ m was used as a protective layer on the remaining resist, and the total light haze was 0.19%.
  • the film haze was a haze meter manufactured by Suga Test Instruments Co., Ltd.
  • HZ-2 the total light haze value (%) of the base small piece was measured according to JIS-K-7136.) was laminated.
  • the pattern was exposed using a photomask provided with the opening of the pattern B shown in FIG. 3 in an aligned state, and after the PET (A) was peeled off, it was developed and washed with water.
  • the copper wiring was etched with Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off with a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
  • a stripping solution KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention addresses one problem of providing a photosensitive transfer member with which the fluctuation of a pattern line width due to a delay after exposure is small, and the resolution of a pattern formed is excellent. In addition, the present invention addresses another problem of providing: a method for producing a resin pattern using the photosensitive transfer member; a method for producing a circuit wiring; and a method for producing a touch panel. The photosensitive transfer member according to the present invention has a temporary support and a photosensitive resin layer, wherein the photosensitive resin layer includes a photoacid generator and at least one among polymer X and polymer Y. The polymer X includes a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-labile group and a structural unit B having a 3- or 4-membered ring ether skeleton, and the polymer Y includes a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-labile group, a structural unit B having a 3-membered or 4-membered ring ether skeleton, and a structural unit C having a basic group. The content of the structural unit B having the 3- or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the photosensitive resin layer is 8.0-700.0 μmol/g with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. Here, when the photosensitive resin layer includes the polymer X, the photosensitive resin layer further includes a basic compound.

Description

感光性転写部材、樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、タッチパネルの製造方法Photosensitive transfer member, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, touch panel manufacturing method
 本発明は、感光性転写部材、樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及びタッチパネルの製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a photosensitive transfer member, a resin pattern manufacturing method, a circuit wiring manufacturing method, and a touch panel manufacturing method.
 静電容量型入力装置等のタッチパネルを備えた表示装置(表示装置としては、具体的には、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置及び液晶表示装置等)では、視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン、周辺配線部分、及び取り出し配線部分の配線等の導電層パターンがタッチパネル内部に設けられている。
 一般的にパターン化した層の形成には、必要とするパターン形状を得るための工程数が少ないといったことから、感光性転写部材(感光性転写材料ともいうこともある。)を用いて任意の基板上に設けた感光性樹脂組成物の層に対して、所望のパターンを有するマスクを介して露光した後に現像する方法が広く使用されている。
In a display device equipped with a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device (specifically, an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, a liquid crystal display device, etc. as a display device), an electrode pattern corresponding to a sensor of a visual recognition unit is used. , The peripheral wiring portion, and the wiring of the take-out wiring portion and the like are provided inside the touch panel.
Generally, in forming a patterned layer, since the number of steps for obtaining the required pattern shape is small, a photosensitive transfer member (also referred to as a photosensitive transfer material) can be used arbitrarily. A method of developing after exposing a layer of a photosensitive resin composition provided on a substrate through a mask having a desired pattern is widely used.
 例えば特許文献1では、「支持体と、下記(A)重合体成分および(B)光酸発生剤を含む感光性樹脂組成物層と、をこの順で有することを特徴とする感光性転写材料。
 (A)下記(1)および(2)の少なくとも一方を満たす重合体を含む重合体成分。
  (1)酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位(a1)および架橋性基を有する構成単位(a2)をともに有する重合体。
  (2)酸基が酸分解性基で保護された基を有する構成単位(a1)を有する重合体および架橋性基を有する構成単位(a2)を有する重合体をともに含む。」が開示されている。特許文献1では、上記架橋性基を有する構成単位(a2)として、エポキシ基及びオキセタニル基のいずれか1種以上を有する構成単位が開示されている。
For example, in Patent Document 1, a photosensitive transfer material comprising "a support and a photosensitive resin composition layer containing the following (A) polymer component and (B) photoacid generator" in this order. ..
(A) A polymer component containing a polymer that satisfies at least one of the following (1) and (2).
(1) A polymer having both a structural unit (a1) having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-degradable group and a structural unit (a2) having a crosslinkable group.
(2) A polymer having a structural unit (a1) having a group in which an acid group is protected by an acid-degradable group and a polymer having a structural unit (a2) having a crosslinkable group are both included. Is disclosed. Patent Document 1 discloses a structural unit having at least one of an epoxy group and an oxetanyl group as the structural unit (a2) having a crosslinkable group.
特開2014-10382号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-10382
 本発明者らは、特許文献1に記載された感光性転写材料を用いてポジ型パターン形成を行ったところ、露光後に所定時間放置した後に現像してパターンを形成した際(言い換えると、引き置いた後に現像してパターンを形成した際)に、放置時間に依存してパターンの線幅が変動する場合があることを知見した。なお、以後、露光後に所定時間放置した後に現像してパターンを形成した際に形成されるパターンの線幅の変動が少ないことを「露光後の引き置きによるパターン線幅の変動が少ない」ともいう。
 また、感光性転写材料には、形成されるパターンの解像性に優れることも基本性能として求められている。
The present inventors performed a positive pattern formation using the photosensitive transfer material described in Patent Document 1, and when the pattern was formed by developing after leaving it for a predetermined time after exposure (in other words, leaving it behind). After that, when the pattern was formed by development), it was found that the line width of the pattern may fluctuate depending on the leaving time. After that, the fact that the line width of the pattern formed when the pattern is formed by developing after leaving it for a predetermined time after exposure is also referred to as "the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement after exposure is small". ..
Further, the photosensitive transfer material is also required to have excellent resolution of the formed pattern as a basic performance.
 そこで、本発明は、露光後の引き置きによるパターン線幅の変動が少なく、且つ、形成されるパターンの解像性にも優れる感光性転写部材を提供することを課題とする。
 また、本発明は、上記感光性転写部材を用いた樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及びタッチパネルの製造方法を提供することを課題とする。
Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a photosensitive transfer member in which the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement after exposure is small and the resolution of the formed pattern is excellent.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a resin pattern using the photosensitive transfer member, a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring, and a method for manufacturing a touch panel.
 本発明者らは、上記課題を解決すべく鋭意検討した結果、感光性樹脂層を所定の組成とすれば上記課題が解決できることを見出し、本発明を完成させた。
 すなわち、以下の構成により上記課題を解決できることを見出した。
As a result of diligent studies to solve the above problems, the present inventors have found that the above problems can be solved if the photosensitive resin layer has a predetermined composition, and have completed the present invention.
That is, it was found that the above problem can be solved by the following configuration.
 〔1〕 仮支持体と感光性樹脂層とを有する感光性転写部材であって、
 上記感光性樹脂層が、
 重合体X及び重合体Yのいずれか1種以上と、
 光酸発生剤と、を含み、
 上記重合体Xは、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aと、3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bとを含み、
 上記重合体Yは、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aと、3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bと、塩基性基を有する構成単位Cとを含み、
 上記感光性樹脂層中における上記3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bの含有量が、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、8.0~700.0μmol/gである、感光性転写部材。
 但し、上記感光性樹脂層が上記重合体Xを含む場合、上記感光性樹脂層がさらに塩基性化合物を含む。
 〔2〕 上記塩基性基を有する構成単位Cと上記塩基性化合物の合計含有量が、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、3.0~100.0μmol/gである、〔1〕に記載の感光性転写部材。
 〔3〕 上記感光性樹脂層中、酸基を有する低分子化合物と、酸基を有する構成単位を含む重合体中に含まれる上記酸基を有する構成単位との合計含有量が、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、100.0μmol/g以下である、〔1〕又は〔2〕に記載の感光性転写部材。
 〔4〕 上記重合体X及び上記重合体Y中における酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aが、後述する式A3で表される構成単位である、〔1〕~〔3〕のいずれかに記載の感光性転写部材。
 〔5〕 上記式A3で表される構成単位中、R31又はR32と、R33とが互いに連結して5員環又は6員環の環状エーテルを形成している、〔4〕に記載の感光性転写部材。
 〔6〕 上記重合体X及び上記重合体Y中における3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bが、後述する式B1~B3で表される部分構造のいずれか有する構造単位である、〔1〕~〔5〕のいずれかに記載の感光性転写部材。
 〔7〕 上記重合体X及び上記重合体Y中における3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bが、後述する式B11~B13で表される構造単位からなる群から選択される、〔1〕~〔6〕のいずれかに記載の感光性転写部材。
 〔8〕 上記重合体X及び上記重合体Yの合計含有量が、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、80質量%以上である、〔1〕~〔7〕のいずれかに記載の感光性転写部材。
〔9〕 上記重合体Yを含む、〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれかに記載の感光性転写部材。
〔10〕 上記重合体Xを含む、〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれかに記載の感光性転写部材。
〔11〕 〔1〕~〔10〕のいずれかに記載の感光性転写部材中の上記感光性樹脂層の上記仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を基板に接触させて、上記感光性転写部材と上記基板と貼り合わせる工程と、
 上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
 露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、をこの順に含む、樹脂パターンの製造方法。
〔12〕 〔1〕~〔10〕のいずれかに記載の感光性転写部材中の上記感光性樹脂層の上記仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を、導電層を有する基板中の上記導電層に接触させて、上記感光性転写部材と上記導電層を有する基板とを貼り合わせる工程と、
 上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
 露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、
 上記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における上記導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む、回路配線の製造方法。
〔13〕 〔1〕~〔10〕のいずれかに記載の感光性転写部材中の上記感光性樹脂層の上記仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を、導電層を有する基板中の上記導電層に接触させて、上記感光性転写部材と上記導電層を有する基板とを貼り合わせる工程と、
 上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
 露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、
 上記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における上記導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む、タッチパネルの製造方法。
[1] A photosensitive transfer member having a temporary support and a photosensitive resin layer.
The photosensitive resin layer is
One or more of polymer X and polymer Y,
Contains photoacid generators,
The polymer X contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group and a structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton.
The polymer Y contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a structural unit B having a 3- or 4-membered ether skeleton, and a structural unit C having a basic group. Including
The content of the structural unit B having the ether skeleton of the 3-membered ring or the 4-membered ring in the photosensitive resin layer is 8.0 to 700.0 μmol / g with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. There is a photosensitive transfer member.
However, when the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X, the photosensitive resin layer further contains a basic compound.
[2] The total content of the structural unit C having the basic group and the basic compound is 3.0 to 100.0 μmol / g with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer [1]. The photosensitive transfer member according to.
[3] The total content of the low molecular weight compound having an acid group in the photosensitive resin layer and the structural unit having an acid group contained in the polymer containing the structural unit having an acid group is the photosensitive. The photosensitive transfer member according to [1] or [2], which is 100.0 μmol / g or less with respect to the total mass of the resin layer.
[4] The structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group in the polymer X and the polymer Y is a structural unit represented by the formula A3 described later, [1] to [3]. ]. The photosensitive transfer member according to any one of.
[5] Described in [4], in the structural unit represented by the above formula A3, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 are connected to each other to form a 5-membered ring or 6-membered ring cyclic ether. Photosensitive transfer member.
[6] The structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the polymer X and the polymer Y is a structural unit having any of the partial structures represented by the formulas B1 to B3 described later. The photosensitive transfer member according to any one of [1] to [5].
[7] The structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the polymer X and the polymer Y is selected from the group consisting of structural units represented by the formulas B11 to B13 described later. , [1] to [6].
[8] The photosensitive according to any one of [1] to [7], wherein the total content of the polymer X and the polymer Y is 80% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. Sex transfer member.
[9] The photosensitive transfer member according to any one of [1] to [8], which contains the polymer Y.
[10] The photosensitive transfer member according to any one of [1] to [8], which contains the polymer X.
[11] The surface of the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member according to any one of [1] to [10] opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the substrate to bring the photosensitive transfer member into contact with the substrate. And the process of bonding with the above substrate,
The process of pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer and
A method for producing a resin pattern, which comprises a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern in this order.
[12] The surface of the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member according to any one of [1] to [10] opposite to the temporary support side is the conductive layer in the substrate having the conductive layer. And the step of adhering the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate having the conductive layer to the substrate.
The process of pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer and
The step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern, and
A method for manufacturing a circuit wiring, comprising, in this order, a step of etching the conductive layer in a region where the resin pattern is not arranged.
[13] The surface of the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member according to any one of [1] to [10] opposite to the temporary support side is the conductive layer in the substrate having the conductive layer. And the step of adhering the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate having the conductive layer to the substrate.
The process of pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer and
The step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern, and
A method for manufacturing a touch panel, comprising, in this order, a step of etching the conductive layer in a region where the resin pattern is not arranged.
 本発明によれば、露光後の引き置きによるパターン線幅の変動が少なく、且つ、形成されるパターンの解像性にも優れる感光性転写部材を提供できる。
 また、本発明によれば、上記感光性転写部材を用いた樹脂パターンの製造方法、回路配線の製造方法、及びタッチパネルの製造方法を提供できる。
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a photosensitive transfer member in which the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement after exposure is small and the resolution of the formed pattern is also excellent.
Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a method for manufacturing a resin pattern using the photosensitive transfer member, a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring, and a method for manufacturing a touch panel.
実施形態に係る感光性転写部材の層構成の一例を示す概略図である。It is the schematic which shows an example of the layer structure of the photosensitive transfer member which concerns on embodiment. パターンAを示す概略図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the pattern A. パターンBを示す概略図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the pattern B.
 以下、本発明について詳細に説明する。
 以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされる場合があるが、本発明はそのような実施態様に限定されない。
 本明細書中における基(原子団)の表記について、本発明の趣旨に反しない限り、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基と共に置換基を有する基をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。また、本明細書中における「有機基」とは、少なくとも1個の炭素原子を含む基をいう。
 置換基は、特に断らない限り、1価の置換基が好ましい。
 本明細書において、「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 本明細書において表記される2価の基の結合方向は、特に断らない限り制限されない。例えば、「X-Y-Z」なる一般式で表される化合物中の、Yが-COO-である場合、Yは、-CO-O-であってもよく、-O-CO-であってもよい。つまり、上記化合物は「X-CO-O-Z」であってもよく「X-O-CO-Z」であってもよい。
 本明細書において、(メタ)アクリレートはアクリレート及びメタクリレートを表し、(メタ)アクリルはアクリル及びメタクリルを表す。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線及びイオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も含む。また、露光に用いられる光としては、一般的に、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV(Extreme Ultraviolet)光)、X線、及び電子線等の活性光線(活性エネルギー線)が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に断りのない限り、TSKgel GMHxL、TSKgel G4000HxL、TSKgel G2000HxL(何れも東ソー(株)製の商品名)のカラムを使用したゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)分析装置により、溶媒THF(テトラヒドロフラン)、示差屈折計により検出し、標準物質としてポリスチレンを用いて換算した分子量である。
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail.
The description of the constituent elements described below may be based on typical embodiments of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to such embodiments.
Regarding the notation of a group (atomic group) in the present specification, unless it is contrary to the gist of the present invention, the notation without substitution and non-substitution includes a group having a substituent as well as a group having no substituent. To do. For example, the "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group). Further, the "organic group" in the present specification means a group containing at least one carbon atom.
Unless otherwise specified, the substituent is preferably a monovalent substituent.
In the present specification, "-" is used to mean that the numerical values described before and after the value are included as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
The bonding direction of the divalent group described in the present specification is not limited unless otherwise specified. For example, when Y is -COO- in the compound represented by the general formula "XYZ", Y may be -CO-O-, and is -O-CO-. You may. That is, the compound may be "X-CO-O-Z" or "X-O-CO-Z".
In the present specification, (meth) acrylate represents acrylate and methacrylate, and (meth) acrylic represents acrylic and methacrylic.
As used herein, the term "exposure" includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified. In addition, as the light used for exposure, generally, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays typified by an excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV (Extreme Ultraviolet) light), X-rays, and active rays such as electron beams ( Active energy rays).
In the present specification, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the resin are columns of TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, and TSKgel G2000HxL (all trade names manufactured by Toso Co., Ltd.) unless otherwise specified. It is a molecular weight converted by using polystyrene as a standard substance detected by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer using the solvent THF (tetrahydrofuran) and a differential refractometer.
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけでなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても工程の所期の目的が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。 In the present specification, the term "process" is included in this term as long as the intended purpose of the process is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes as well as an independent process.
 本明細書において、ハロゲン原子としては、例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、及びヨウ素原子が挙げられる。 In the present specification, examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
[感光性転写部材]
 本発明の感光性転写部材は、
 仮支持体と感光性樹脂層とを有する感光性転写部材であって、
 上記感光性樹脂層が、
 重合体X及び重合体Yのいずれか1種以上(以下、「特定重合体」ともいう。)と、
 光酸発生剤と、を含み、
 上記重合体Xは、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aと、3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bとを含み、
 上記重合体Yは、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aと、3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bと、塩基性基を有する構成単位Cとを含み、
 感光性樹脂層における上記3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bの含有量が、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、8.0~700.0μmol/gである。
 但し、感光性樹脂層が重合体Xを含む場合、感光性樹脂層がさらに塩基性化合物を含む。
[Photosensitive transfer member]
The photosensitive transfer member of the present invention is
A photosensitive transfer member having a temporary support and a photosensitive resin layer.
The photosensitive resin layer is
Any one or more of the polymer X and the polymer Y (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific polymer”) and
Contains photoacid generators,
The polymer X contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group and a structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton.
The polymer Y contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a structural unit B having a 3- or 4-membered ether skeleton, and a structural unit C having a basic group. Including
The content of the structural unit B having the ether skeleton of the 3-membered ring or the 4-membered ring in the photosensitive resin layer is 8.0 to 700.0 μmol / g with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
However, when the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X, the photosensitive resin layer further contains a basic compound.
 本発明の感光性転写部材は、上記構成により、露光後の引き置きによるパターン線幅の変動が少なく、且つ、形成されるパターンの解像性にも優れる。これは、詳細には明らかではないが、本発明者らは以下のように推測している。
 本発明の感光性転写部材の特徴点としては、3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bを所定含有量で含む点が挙げられる。この構成単位B中の3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格は、感光性樹脂層内に生じた強酸に対して塩基として機能する。すなわち、構成単位B中の3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格は、感光性樹脂層内に生じた強酸をトラップして開裂反応を起こすことにより、この強酸を失活させ得る酸拡散制御剤として機能する(例えば、構成単位B中の3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格がエポキシ基であり、感光性樹脂層内に生じた強酸がトルエンスルホン酸である場合、下記反応が生じ得る)。なお、失活した強酸は、酸性度が弱まるため、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aの脱保護反応には寄与しない。
Due to the above configuration, the photosensitive transfer member of the present invention has less variation in the pattern line width due to placement after exposure, and is also excellent in resolvability of the formed pattern. This is not clear in detail, but the present inventors speculate as follows.
A feature of the photosensitive transfer member of the present invention is that it contains a constituent unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in a predetermined content. The 3-membered or 4-membered ether skeleton in the structural unit B functions as a base for the strong acid generated in the photosensitive resin layer. That is, the 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the constituent unit B is an acid diffusion control agent capable of inactivating the strong acid by trapping the strong acid generated in the photosensitive resin layer and causing a cleavage reaction. (For example, when the ether skeleton of the 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring in the structural unit B is an epoxy group and the strong acid generated in the photosensitive resin layer is toluenesulfonic acid, the following reaction can occur). .. Since the deactivated strong acid has a weakened acidity, it does not contribute to the deprotection reaction of the structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 つまり、感光性樹脂層が構成単位Bを含むことで、感光性転写部材を露光後に引き置いた場合であっても、露光部で発生した酸が未露光部へ拡散するのが抑制され得る。
 上記開裂反応は、感光性樹脂層が含む塩基性化合物と酸との中和反応と比較すると、反応速度が遅く緩やかな反応である。このため、感光性樹脂層中における構成単位Bの含有量が所定量に調整されていれば、上記構成単位Bが、露光時に露光部にて光酸発生剤から発生する酸を不要に失活させず(すなわち、構成単位Aの脱保護反応を不要に阻害せず)、感光性転写部材は、これに起因したパターンの解像性の低下を招くことはない。なお、本発明者らは、感光性樹脂層中の塩基性化合物の含有量を増やすことで感光性転写部材の露光後の引き置きにおける安定性を向上させることを試みたが、塩基性化合物の含有量が増加すると、感光性樹脂層の感度が低下する傾向にあることを知見している。つまり、感光性樹脂層が構成単位Bを所定量含むことで、良好な感度を達成しつつ、所望の効果が発現し得る。
 本発明者らは、今般の検討により、感光性樹脂層中における上記構成単位Bの含有量が、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して8.0μmol/g以上である場合、感光性転写部材は、露光後の引き置きによるパターン線幅の変動が少なく、一方、上記構成単位Bの含有量が、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して700.0μmol/g以下である場合、感光性転写部材により形成されるパターンの解像性が優れることを確認している。
That is, since the photosensitive resin layer contains the structural unit B, it is possible to suppress the diffusion of the acid generated in the exposed portion to the unexposed portion even when the photosensitive transfer member is left behind after exposure.
The cleavage reaction is a slow reaction with a slower reaction rate than the neutralization reaction between the basic compound contained in the photosensitive resin layer and the acid. Therefore, if the content of the structural unit B in the photosensitive resin layer is adjusted to a predetermined amount, the structural unit B unnecessarily deactivates the acid generated from the photoacid generator in the exposed portion at the time of exposure. The photosensitive transfer member does not cause a decrease in the resolution of the pattern due to this (that is, it does not unnecessarily inhibit the deprotection reaction of the structural unit A). The present inventors have attempted to improve the stability of the photosensitive transfer member after exposure by increasing the content of the basic compound in the photosensitive resin layer, but the basic compound It has been found that as the content increases, the sensitivity of the photosensitive resin layer tends to decrease. That is, when the photosensitive resin layer contains a predetermined amount of the structural unit B, a desired effect can be exhibited while achieving good sensitivity.
According to the present study, the present inventors have found that when the content of the structural unit B in the photosensitive resin layer is 8.0 μmol / g or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, the photosensitive transfer member Is, when the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the leaving after exposure is small, and the content of the structural unit B is 700.0 μmol / g or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, the photosensitive transfer is performed. It has been confirmed that the resolution of the pattern formed by the members is excellent.
 以下において、本発明の感光性転写部材について詳述する。
 図1は、本発明の感光性転写部材の実施形態の一例を示す断面模式図である。
 図1に示す感光性転写部材100は、仮支持体12と、感光性樹脂層14と、カバーフィルム16とがこの順に積層された構成である。
 感光性樹脂層12は、重合体X及び重合体Yのいずれか1種以上と、光酸発生剤とを含み、重合体X及び重合体Y中に含まれる3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bの含有量が、上記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、8.0~700.0μmol/gである。但し、感光性樹脂層が重合体Xを含む場合、感光性樹脂層がさらに塩基性化合物を含む。
Hereinafter, the photosensitive transfer member of the present invention will be described in detail.
FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of an embodiment of the photosensitive transfer member of the present invention.
The photosensitive transfer member 100 shown in FIG. 1 has a structure in which a temporary support 12, a photosensitive resin layer 14, and a cover film 16 are laminated in this order.
The photosensitive resin layer 12 contains one or more of the polymer X and the polymer Y and a photoacid generator, and is a 3-membered or 4-membered ether contained in the polymer X and the polymer Y. The content of the structural unit B having a skeleton is 8.0 to 700.0 μmol / g with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. However, when the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X, the photosensitive resin layer further contains a basic compound.
 なお、本発明の感光性転写部材中に含まれる感光性樹脂層は、いわゆる「ポジ型感光性樹脂組成物層」に該当し、化学増幅型ポジ型感光性樹脂組成物層であることが好ましい。
 後述するオニウム塩、及びオキシムスルホネート化合物等の光酸発生剤は、活性放射線(活性光線)に感応して生成される酸が、特定重合体中の保護された酸基の脱保護に対して触媒として作用するので、1個の光量子の作用で生成した酸が、多数の脱保護反応に寄与し、量子収率は1を超え、例えば、10の数乗のような大きい値となり、いわゆる化学増幅の結果として、高感度が得られる。
 一方、活性光線に感応する光酸発生剤としてキノンジアジド化合物を用いた場合、逐次型光化学反応により酸基を生成するが、その量子収率は必ず1以下であり、化学増幅型には該当しない。
The photosensitive resin layer contained in the photosensitive transfer member of the present invention corresponds to the so-called "positive photosensitive resin composition layer", and is preferably a chemically amplified positive photosensitive resin composition layer. ..
In the photoacid generators such as the onium salt and the oxime sulfonate compound described later, the acid generated in response to active radiation (active light) catalyzes the deprotection of the protected acid group in the specific polymer. The acid produced by the action of one photon contributes to many deprotection reactions, and the quantum yield exceeds 1, which is a large value such as the power of 10, so-called chemical amplification. As a result of, high sensitivity is obtained.
On the other hand, when a quinonediazide compound is used as a photoacid generator that is sensitive to active light, an acid group is generated by a sequential photochemical reaction, but the quantum yield is always 1 or less, and it does not correspond to the chemically amplified type.
〔仮支持体〕
 仮支持体は、感光性樹脂層を支持し、感光性樹脂層から剥離可能な支持体である。
 仮支持体は、感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する際に仮支持体を介して感光性樹脂層を露光し得る点で、光透過性を有することが好ましい。
 ここで「光透過性を有する」とは、パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率が50%以上であることを意味する。パターン露光に使用する光の主波長の透過率は、露光感度がより優れる点で、60%以上が好ましく、70%以上がより好ましい。透過率の測定方法としては、大塚電子(株)製MCPD Seriesを用いて測定する方法が挙げられる。
[Temporary support]
The temporary support is a support that supports the photosensitive resin layer and can be peeled off from the photosensitive resin layer.
The temporary support preferably has light transmittance in that the photosensitive resin layer can be exposed through the temporary support when the photosensitive resin layer is pattern-exposed.
Here, "having light transmittance" means that the transmittance of the main wavelength of light used for pattern exposure is 50% or more. The transmittance of the main wavelength of the light used for the pattern exposure is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 70% or more in that the exposure sensitivity is more excellent. Examples of the method for measuring the transmittance include a method of measuring using MCPD Series manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.
 仮支持体としては、具体的には、ガラス基板、樹脂フィルム、及び紙等が挙げられ、強度及び可撓性等がより優れる点で、樹脂フィルムが好ましい。樹脂フィルムとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、及びポリカーボネートフィルム等が挙げられる。なかでも、2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが好ましい。 Specific examples of the temporary support include a glass substrate, a resin film, paper, and the like, and a resin film is preferable because it is more excellent in strength, flexibility, and the like. Examples of the resin film include polyethylene terephthalate film, cellulose triacetate film, polystyrene film, polycarbonate film and the like. Of these, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film is preferable.
 仮支持体の厚みとしては特に制限されず、5~200μmが好ましく、取扱い易さ及び汎用性に優れる点で、10~150μmがより好ましい。
 仮支持体の厚みは、支持体としての強度、回路配線形成用基板との貼り合わせに求められる可撓性、及び、最初の露光工程で要求される光透過性等の点から、材質に応じて適宜選択し得る。
The thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, and is preferably 5 to 200 μm, and more preferably 10 to 150 μm in terms of ease of handling and versatility.
The thickness of the temporary support depends on the material in terms of strength as a support, flexibility required for bonding to a circuit wiring forming substrate, and light transmission required in the first exposure process. Can be selected as appropriate.
 仮支持体の好ましい態様としては、例えば、特開2014-85643号公報の段落0017~段落0018、特開2016-27363号公報の段落0019~0026、WO2012/081680A1公報の段落0041~0057、及びWO2018/179370A1公報の段落0029~0040に記載があり、これらの公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Preferred embodiments of the provisional support include, for example, paragraphs 0017 to 0018 of JP2014-85643, paragraphs 0019 to 0026 of JP2016-27363, paragraphs 0041 to 0057 of WO2012 / 08168A1 and WO2018. / 179370A1 Publications are described in paragraphs 0029 to 0040, and the contents of these publications are incorporated herein by reference.
〔感光性樹脂層〕
<特定重合体>
 感光性樹脂層は、重合体X及び重合体Yのいずれか1種以上(特定重合体)を含む。
 重合体X:酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aと、3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bとを含む重合体。
 重合体Y:酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aと、3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bと、塩基性基を有する構成単位Cとを含む重合体。
 なお、重合体Xと重合体Yとは、塩基性基を有する構成単位Cを含むか否かの点でのみ異なる。
 また、構成単位Aにおいて「酸分解性基で保護された酸基」とは、酸の作用により分解する保護基で保護された酸基を意図する。
[Photosensitive resin layer]
<Specific polymer>
The photosensitive resin layer contains any one or more of polymer X and polymer Y (specific polymer).
Polymer X: A polymer containing a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group and a structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton.
Polymer Y: A weight containing a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a structural unit B having a 3- or 4-membered ether skeleton, and a structural unit C having a basic group. Combined.
Note that the polymer X and the polymer Y differ only in whether or not they contain a structural unit C having a basic group.
Further, in the structural unit A, the "acid group protected by an acid-degradable group" means an acid group protected by a protecting group that decomposes by the action of an acid.
 重合体X及び重合体Yは、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aを含む。このため、重合体X及び重合体Yは、露光により生じる触媒量の酸等の酸性物質の作用により、酸分解性基で保護された酸基が脱保護反応を受けて酸基となる。この酸基により、感光性樹脂層の現像液への溶解が可能となる。 The polymer X and the polymer Y include a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group. Therefore, in the polymer X and the polymer Y, the acid group protected by the acid-degradable group undergoes a deprotection reaction to become an acid group due to the action of an acidic substance such as an acid in a catalytic amount generated by exposure. This acid group enables the photosensitive resin layer to be dissolved in a developing solution.
 重合体X及び重合体Yとしては、付加重合型の樹脂が好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位を含む重合体がより好ましい。なお、重合体X及び重合体Yは、(メタ)アクリル酸又はそのエステルに由来する構成単位以外の構成単位、例えば、スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位、及びビニル化合物に由来する構成単位等を含んでいてもよい。 As the polymer X and the polymer Y, an addition polymerization type resin is preferable, and a polymer containing a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof is more preferable. The polymer X and the polymer Y include a structural unit other than the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid or an ester thereof, for example, a structural unit derived from a styrene compound, a structural unit derived from a vinyl compound, and the like. You may be.
 以下において、まず重合体Xについて説明する。
(重合体X)
≪構成単位A≫
 重合体Xは、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aを含む。
 上記酸基及び上記酸分解性基としては、公知のものを使用でき、特に制限されない。酸基の定義は後述のとおりであり、具体的には、カルボキシ基、又はフェノール性水酸基が好ましい。
 また、上記酸分解性基としては、酸により比較的分解し易い基(例えば、1-アルコキシアルキル基、テトラヒドロピラニル基、及びテトラヒドロフラニル基等のアセタール型保護基)であっても、酸により比較的分解し難い基(例えば、tert-ブチル基等の第三級アルキル基、及びtert-ブチルオキシカルボニル基等の第三級アルキルオキシカルボニル基(炭酸エステル型保護基))であってもよい。上記酸分解性基としては、なかでも、感度及び解像度がより優れる点で、アセタールの形で保護された構造を有する基(アセタール型酸分解性基)であることが好ましい。
 更に、上記酸分解性基で保護された酸基としては、なかでも、感度及び解像度がより優れる点で、アセタール型酸分解性基で保護されたカルボキシ基が好ましい。
 また、上記酸分解性基としては、導電パターンの形成に適用した場合における導電配線の線幅のバラツキが抑制される点から、分子量が300以下の酸分解性基であることが好ましい。
Hereinafter, the polymer X will be described first.
(Polymer X)
≪Structural unit A≫
The polymer X contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid degradable group.
As the acid group and the acid-decomposable group, known ones can be used and are not particularly limited. The definition of the acid group is as described later, and specifically, a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable.
Further, even if the acid-degradable group is a group that is relatively easily decomposed by an acid (for example, an acetal-type protective group such as a 1-alkoxyalkyl group, a tetrahydropyranyl group, and a tetrahydrofuranyl group), the acid can be used. It may be a group that is relatively difficult to decompose (for example, a tertiary alkyl group such as a tert-butyl group and a tertiary alkyloxycarbonyl group such as a tert-butyloxycarbonyl group (carbonic acid ester type protective group)). .. The acid-degradable group is preferably a group having a structure protected in the form of acetal (acetal-type acid-degradable group) in that the sensitivity and resolution are more excellent.
Further, as the acid group protected by the acid-degradable group, a carboxy group protected by an acetal-type acid-degradable group is preferable in terms of more excellent sensitivity and resolution.
Further, the acid-decomposable group is preferably an acid-decomposable group having a molecular weight of 300 or less from the viewpoint of suppressing variation in the line width of the conductive wiring when applied to the formation of a conductive pattern.
 酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aとしては、感度及び解像度がより優れる点で、式A1、式A2、又は式A3で表される構成単位が好ましく、式A3で表される構成単位がより好ましい。 As the structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, the structural unit represented by the formula A1, the formula A2, or the formula A3 is preferable in that the sensitivity and the resolution are more excellent, and the structural unit A is represented by the formula A3. The structural unit is more preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 式A1中、R11及びR12は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。但し、R11及びR12の少なくとも一方は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。R13は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。R14は、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。Xは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。R15は、置換基を表す。nは、0~4の整数を表す。なお、R11又はR12と、R13とが互いに連結して3員環又は4員環以外の環状エーテルを形成していてもよい。 In formula A1, R 11 and R 12 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. However, at least one of R 11 and R 12 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 13 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 14 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. X 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. R 15 represents a substituent. n represents an integer from 0 to 4. In addition, R 11 or R 12 and R 13 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring.
 式A2中、R21及びR22は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。但し、R21及びR22の少なくとも一方は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。R23は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。R24は、それぞれ独立に、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルケニル基、アリール基、アラルキル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アリールカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、又はシクロアルキル基を表す。mは、0~3の整数を表す。なお、R21又はR22と、R23とが互いに連結して3員環又は4員環以外の環状エーテルを形成していてもよい。 In formula A2, R 21 and R 22 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. However, at least one of R 21 and R 22 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 23 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 24 is independently a hydroxy group, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an arylcarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, or a cycloalkyl group. Represents. m represents an integer of 0 to 3. In addition, R 21 or R 22 and R 23 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring.
 式A3中、R31及びR32は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。但し、R31及びR32の少なくとも一方は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。R33は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。R34は、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。Xは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。なお、R31又はR32と、R33とが互いに連結して3員環又は4員環以外の環状エーテルを形成していてもよい。 In formula A3, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. However, at least one of R 31 and R 32 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. In addition, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring.
 式A3中、R31及びR32で表されるアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10(好ましくは炭素数1~6、より好ましくは炭素数1~4)の直鎖状、分岐鎖状、又は環状のアルキル基が好ましい。
 R31及びR32で表されるアリール基としては、フェニル基が好ましい。
 R31及びR32としては、なかでも、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基が好ましい。
 R31及びR32で表されるアルキル基及びアリール基は、さらに置換基を有していてもよい。
In the formula A3, the alkyl group represented by R 31 and R 32 is a linear or branched chain having 1 to 10 carbon atoms (preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 4 carbon atoms). Alternatively, a cyclic alkyl group is preferable.
As the aryl group represented by R 31 and R 32 , a phenyl group is preferable.
As R 31 and R 32 , a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable, respectively.
The alkyl and aryl groups represented by R 31 and R 32 may further have a substituent.
 式A3中、R33で表されるアルキル基及びアリール基としては、それぞれ、R31及びR32で表されるアルキル基及びアリール基と同様のものが挙げられ、好適態様も同じである。
 R33で表されるアルキル基及びアリール基は、さらに置換基を有していてもよい。
In the formula A3, examples of the alkyl group and the aryl group represented by R 33 include the same alkyl and aryl groups represented by R 31 and R 32 , respectively, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
The alkyl group and aryl group represented by R 33 may further have a substituent.
 式A3中、R31又はR32と、R33とが互いに連結して環状エーテルを形成していてもよい。但し、上記環状エーテルは、3員環又は4員環以外の環状エーテルであり、5員環又は6員環が好ましく、5員環がより好ましい。 In the formula A3, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic ether. However, the cyclic ether is a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring, and a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring is preferable, and a 5-membered ring is more preferable.
 式A3中、Xで表される2価の連結基としては、特に制限されないが、アリーレン基が好ましい。なお、上記アリーレン基は、さらに置換基を有していてもよい。
 Xとしては、単結合が好ましい。
 上記式A3で表される構成単位Aは、アセタール型酸分解性基で保護されたカルボキシ基を有する構成単位である。重合体Xが式A3で表される構成単位Aを含む場合、パターン形成時の感度に優れ、また解像度がより優れる。
In the formula A3, the divalent linking group represented by X 0 is not particularly limited, but an arylene group is preferable. The arylene group may further have a substituent.
As X 0 , a single bond is preferable.
The structural unit A represented by the above formula A3 is a structural unit having a carboxy group protected by an acetal-type acid-degradable group. When the polymer X contains the structural unit A represented by the formula A3, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is excellent, and the resolution is more excellent.
 式A3中、R34としては、重合体Xのガラス転移温度(Tg)をより低くし得るという点から、水素原子が好ましい。
 重合体Xに含まれる構成単位A中、式A3におけるR34が水素原子である構成単位の含有量は、重合体Xに含まれる構成単位Aの全質量に対して、20質量%以上であることが好ましい。なお、構成単位A中の、式A3におけるR34が水素原子である構成単位の含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-核磁気共鳴スペクトル(NMR)測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認できる。
In Formula A3, as the R 34, from the viewpoint of the glass transition temperature of the polymer X (Tg) may be lower and a hydrogen atom is preferable.
Among the structural units A contained in the polymer X, the content of the structural unit in which R 34 is a hydrogen atom in the formula A3 is 20% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the structural unit A contained in the polymer X. Is preferable. The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit in which R 34 in the formula A3 is a hydrogen atom in the structural unit A is calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum (NMR) measurement. It can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity.
 また、式A1~式A3の好ましい態様としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0044~段落0058を参照できる。 Further, as a preferred embodiment of the formulas A1 to A3, paragraphs 0044 to 0058 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be referred to.
 式A1中、感度がより優れる点で、R11又はR12と、R13とが互いに連結して3員環又は4員環以外の環状エーテルを形成していることが好ましい。上記環状エーテルとしては、5員環又は6員環状の環状エーテルが好ましく、テトラヒドロフラン環又はテトラヒドロピラン環がより好ましく、テトラヒドロフラン環が更に好ましい。
 式A2中、感度がより優れる点で、R21又はR22と、R23とが互いに連結して3員環又は4員環以外の環状エーテルを形成していることが好ましい。上記環状エーテルとしては、5員環又は6員環状の環状エーテルが好ましく、テトラヒドロフラン環又はテトラヒドロピラン環がより好ましく、テトラヒドロフラン環が更に好ましい。
 式A3中、感度がより優れる点で、R31又はR32と、R33とが互いに連結して3員環又は4員環以外の環状エーテルを形成していることが好ましい。上記環状エーテルとしては、5員環又は6員環状の環状エーテルが好ましく、テトラヒドロフラン環又はテトラヒドロピラン環がより好ましく、テトラヒドロフラン環が更に好ましい。
In the formula A1, it is preferable that R 11 or R 12 and R 13 are connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring in that the sensitivity is more excellent. As the cyclic ether, a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered cyclic ether is preferable, a tetrahydrofuran ring or a tetrahydropyran ring is more preferable, and a tetrahydrofuran ring is further preferable.
In the formula A2, it is preferable that R 21 or R 22 and R 23 are connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring in that the sensitivity is more excellent. As the cyclic ether, a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered cyclic ether is preferable, a tetrahydrofuran ring or a tetrahydropyran ring is more preferable, and a tetrahydrofuran ring is further preferable.
In the formula A3, it is preferable that R 31 or R 32 and R 33 are connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring in that the sensitivity is more excellent. As the cyclic ether, a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered cyclic ether is preferable, a tetrahydrofuran ring or a tetrahydropyran ring is more preferable, and a tetrahydrofuran ring is further preferable.
 重合体X中に含まれる構成単位Aは、1種であっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体Xにおける構成単位Aの含有量(構成単位Aが複数種含まれる場合はその合計含有量)は、重合体Xの全質量に対して、10~70質量%が好ましく、15~50質量%がより好ましく、20~40質量%が更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度がより向上する。なお、重合体Xにおける構成単位Aの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認できる。
The structural unit A contained in the polymer X may be one type or two or more types.
The content of the structural unit A in the polymer X (when a plurality of types of the structural unit A are contained, the total content thereof) is preferably 10 to 70% by mass, preferably 15 to 50% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer X. % Is more preferable, and 20 to 40% by mass is further preferable. Within the above range, the resolution is further improved. The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the polymer X can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
≪構成単位B≫
 重合体Xは、3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bを含む。
 3員環のエーテル骨格(エポキシ基)を有する構成単位Bを形成する単量体の具体例としては、例えば、アクリル酸グリシジル、メタクリル酸グリシジル、α-エチルアクリル酸グリシジル、α-n-プロピルアクリル酸グリシジル、α-n-ブチルアクリル酸グリシジル、アクリル酸-3,4-エポキシブチル、メタクリル酸-3,4-エポキシブチル、アクリル酸-3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル、メタクリル酸-3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル、α-エチルアクリル酸-3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル、o-ビニルベンジルグリシジルエーテル、m-ビニルベンジルグリシジルエーテル、p-ビニルベンジルグリシジルエーテル、及び特許第4168443号公報の段落0031~段落0035に記載の脂環式エポキシ骨格を含有する化合物等が挙げられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 4員環のエーテル骨格(オキセタニル基)を有する構成単位Bを形成する単量体の具体例としては、例えば、特開2001-330953号公報の段落0011~段落0016に記載のオキセタニル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸エステル等が挙げられ、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
≪Structural unit B≫
Polymer X comprises a building block B having a 3- or 4-membered ether backbone.
Specific examples of the monomer forming the structural unit B having a 3-membered ether skeleton (epoxy group) include glycidyl acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, glycidyl α-ethyl acrylate, and α-n-propyl acrylic. Glycidyl acid, α-n-butyl glycidyl acrylate, acrylic acid-3,4-epoxybutyl, methacrylic acid-3,4-epoxybutyl, acrylate-3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl, methacrylic acid-3,4- Epoxycyclohexylmethyl, α-ethylacrylic acid-3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl, o-vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether, m-vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether, p-vinylbenzyl glycidyl ether, and paragraphs 0031 to paragraphs of Patent No. 4168443. Examples thereof include the compounds containing the alicyclic epoxy skeleton described in 0035, and these contents are incorporated in the present specification.
Specific examples of the monomer forming the structural unit B having a 4-membered ether skeleton (oxetanyl group) include the oxetanyl groups described in paragraphs 0011 to 0016 of JP-A-2001-330953 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-330953). Meta) acrylic acid esters and the like, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
 3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bは、なかでも、下記式B1~B3で表される部分構造のいずれかを有する構造単位であることが好ましい。 The structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton is preferably a structural unit having any of the partial structures represented by the following formulas B1 to B3.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 式B2中、Rb0は、水素原子、又はアルキル基を表す。
 Rb0で表されるアルキル基の炭素数としては、1~10が好ましく、1~6がより好ましく、1~4が更に好ましい。上記アルキル基は、直鎖状又は分岐鎖状であることが好ましい。また、上記アルキル基は、さらに置換基を有していてもよい。
In formula B2, R b0 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by R b0 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 6, and even more preferably 1 to 4. The alkyl group is preferably linear or branched. Further, the above alkyl group may further have a substituent.
 3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bとしては、下記式B11~B13で表される構造単位のいずれかであることがより好ましい。 The structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton is more preferably any of the structural units represented by the following formulas B11 to B13.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 式B2中、Rb1は、水素原子、又はメチル基を表す。 In formula B2, R b1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
 重合体X中に含まれる構成単位Bは、1種であっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体Xにおける構成単位Bの含有量(構成単位Bが複数種含まれる場合はその合計含有量)は、重合体Xの全質量に対して、0.1~20質量%が好ましく、0.1~15質量%がより好ましく、0.1~10質量%が更に好ましい。なお、重合体Xにおける構成単位Bの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認できる。
The structural unit B contained in the polymer X may be one type or two or more types.
The content of the structural unit B in the polymer X (when a plurality of types of the structural unit B are contained, the total content thereof) is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer X. 1 to 15% by mass is more preferable, and 0.1 to 10% by mass is further preferable. The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the polymer X can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
≪その他の構成単位≫
 重合体Xは、その他の構成単位を含んでいてもよい。
 以下において、重合体Xが含み得るその他の構成単位について述べる。
 ・酸基を有する構成単位D
 重合体Xは、酸基を有する構成単位D(以下、「構成単位D」ともいう。)を含んでいてもよい。
 構成単位Dは、酸分解性基で保護されていない酸基、すなわち、保護基を有さない酸基を有する構成単位である。重合体Xが構成単位Dを含むことで、パターン形成時の感度が良好となり、パターン露光後の現像工程においてアルカリ性の現像液に溶けやすくなり、現像時間の短縮化を図ることができる。
 なお、本明細書における酸基とは、pKaが12以下のプロトン解離性基を意味する。
 酸基のpKaは、感度向上の点から、10以下が好ましく、6以下がより好ましい。
また、酸基のpKaの下限値としては、-5以上が好ましい。
 上記酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性水酸基、及びスルホニルイミド基等が挙げられる。なかでも、カルボキシ基又はフェノール性水酸基が好ましく、カルボキシ基がより好ましい。
≪Other building blocks≫
The polymer X may contain other structural units.
In the following, other structural units that the polymer X may contain will be described.
-Constituent unit D having an acid group
The polymer X may contain a structural unit D having an acid group (hereinafter, also referred to as “constituent unit D”).
The structural unit D is a structural unit having an acid group that is not protected by an acid-degradable group, that is, an acid group that does not have a protecting group. When the polymer X contains the structural unit D, the sensitivity at the time of pattern formation is improved, the polymer X is easily dissolved in an alkaline developer in the developing process after pattern exposure, and the developing time can be shortened.
The acid group in the present specification means a proton dissociative group having a pKa of 12 or less.
The pKa of the acid group is preferably 10 or less, more preferably 6 or less, from the viewpoint of improving sensitivity.
The lower limit of pKa of the acid group is preferably −5 or higher.
Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, a sulfonylimide group and the like. Of these, a carboxy group or a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferable, and a carboxy group is more preferable.
 重合体Xに含まれる構成単位Dは、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体Xが構成単位Dを含む場合、重合体Xにおける構成単位Dの含有量(構成単位Dが複数種含まれる場合はその合計含有量)は、重合体Xの全質量に対して、例えば、0.1質量%以上である。また、その上限値は特に制限されないが、例えば、10質量%以下であり、1.0質量%以下が好ましい。なお、重合体Xにおける構成単位Dの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認できる。
The structural unit D contained in the polymer X may be only one type or two or more types.
When the polymer X contains the structural unit D, the content of the structural unit D in the polymer X (if a plurality of types of the structural unit D are contained, the total content thereof) is, for example, the total mass of the polymer X. , 0.1% by mass or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 10% by mass or less, preferably 1.0% by mass or less. The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit D in the polymer X can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
 ・構成単位E
 重合体Xは、既述の構成単位A、構成単位B、及び構成単位D以外のその他の構成単位E(以下「構成単位E」ともいう。但し、構成単位Eは、後述する構成単位C(重合体Yが含む構成単位に該当する。)を含まない)を含んでいてもよい。
 構成単位Eを形成する単量体としては特に制限はなく、例えば、スチレン類、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸環状アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸アリールエステル、不飽和ジカルボン酸ジエステル、ビシクロ不飽和化合物、マレイミド化合物、不飽和芳香族化合物、共役ジエン系化合物、不飽和モノカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸、不飽和ジカルボン酸無水物、脂肪族環式骨格を有する基、及びその他の不飽和化合物が挙げられる。
 構成単位Eを用いて、種類及び含有量の少なくともいずれかを調整することで、重合体Xの諸特性を調整できる。特に、構成単位Eを含むことで、重合体XのTg、酸価、及び親疎水性を容易に調整できる。
・ Structural unit E
The polymer X is a structural unit A other than the above-mentioned structural unit A, structural unit B, and structural unit D (hereinafter, also referred to as “constituent unit E”. However, the structural unit E is a structural unit C (described later). It does not include), which corresponds to the structural unit contained in the polymer Y).
The monomer forming the structural unit E is not particularly limited, and for example, styrenes, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid cyclic alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid aryl ester, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid. Diesters, bicyclounsaturated compounds, maleimide compounds, unsaturated aromatic compounds, conjugated diene compounds, unsaturated monocarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acids, unsaturated dicarboxylic acid anhydrides, groups with an aliphatic cyclic skeleton, and others. Unsaturated compounds of.
Various properties of the polymer X can be adjusted by adjusting at least one of the type and the content using the structural unit E. In particular, by including the structural unit E, the Tg, acid value, and affinity hydrophobicity of the polymer X can be easily adjusted.
 構成単位Eとしては、具体的には、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、メトキシスチレン、エトキシスチレン、クロロスチレン、ビニル安息香酸メチル、ビニル安息香酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-ヒドロキシプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジル、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロペンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、アクリロニトリル、又は、エチレングリコールモノアセトアセテートモノ(メタ)アクリレート等を重合して形成される構成単位が挙げられる。その他、特開2004-264623号公報の段落0021~段落0024に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Specifically, the constituent unit E includes styrene, α-methylstyrene, acetoxystyrene, methoxystyrene, ethoxystyrene, chlorostyrene, methyl vinyl benzoate, ethyl vinyl benzoate, methyl (meth) acrylate, and (meth). Ethyl acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) ) 2-Hydroxypropyl acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, cyclopentyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, isobornyl (meth) acrylate, acrylonitrile, or ethylene glycol monoacetate mono (meth) acrylate Examples thereof include structural units formed by polymerizing and the like. In addition, the compounds described in paragraphs 0021 to 0024 of JP2004-246623A can be mentioned.
 また、構成単位Eを形成する単量体としては、密着性をより向上させる点から、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが好ましく、炭素数4~12のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルがより好ましい。具体的には、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸n-ブチル、及び(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル等が挙げられる。 Further, as the monomer forming the structural unit E, a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable from the viewpoint of further improving adhesion, and a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 4 to 12 carbon atoms is preferable. Is more preferable. Specific examples thereof include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate.
 重合体Xに含まれる構成単位Eは、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体Xが構成単位Eを含む場合、重合体Xにおける構成単位Eの含有量(構成単位Eが複数種含まれる場合はその合計含有量)は、重合体Xの全質量に対して、90質量%以下が好ましく、85質量%以下がより好ましく、80質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限値としては、10質量%以上が好ましく、20質量%以上がより好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度及び密着性がより向上する。なお、重合体Xにおける構成単位Eの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認できる。
The structural unit E contained in the polymer X may be only one type or two or more types.
When the polymer X contains the structural unit E, the content of the structural unit E in the polymer X (if a plurality of structural units E are contained, the total content thereof) is 90 with respect to the total mass of the polymer X. It is preferably mass% or less, more preferably 85% by mass or less, and even more preferably 80% by mass or less. As the lower limit value, 10% by mass or more is preferable, and 20% by mass or more is more preferable. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved. The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit E in the polymer X can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
 以下、重合体Yについて説明する。なお、重合体Xと重合体Yとは、塩基性基を有する構成単位Cを含むか否かの点でのみ異なる。
(重合体Y)
≪構成単位A≫
 重合体Yは、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aを含む。
 酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aとしては、上述した重合体X中に含まれる酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aと同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
Hereinafter, the polymer Y will be described. Note that the polymer X and the polymer Y differ only in whether or not they contain a structural unit C having a basic group.
(Polymer Y)
≪Structural unit A≫
The polymer Y contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group.
The structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group has the same meaning as the structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group contained in the polymer X described above, and has a preferred embodiment. It is the same.
 重合体Y中に含まれる構成単位Aは、1種であっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体Yにおける構成単位Aの含有量(構成単位Aが複数種含まれる場合はその合計含有量)は、重合体Yの全質量に対して、10~70質量%が好ましく、15~50質量%がより好ましく、20~40質量%が更に好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度がより向上する。なお、重合体Yにおける構成単位Aの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認できる。
The structural unit A contained in the polymer Y may be one type or two or more types.
The content of the structural unit A in the polymer Y (when a plurality of types of the structural unit A are contained, the total content thereof) is preferably 10 to 70% by mass, preferably 15 to 50% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer Y. % Is more preferable, and 20 to 40% by mass is further preferable. Within the above range, the resolution is further improved. The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit A in the polymer Y can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
≪構成単位B≫
 重合体Yは、3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bを含む。
 3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bとしては、上述した重合体X中に含まれる3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bと同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
≪Structural unit B≫
Polymer Y comprises a building block B having a 3- or 4-membered ether skeleton.
The structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton is synonymous with the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton contained in the polymer X described above, and has a preferred embodiment. It is the same.
 重合体Y中に含まれる構成単位Bは、1種であっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体Yにおける構成単位Bの含有量(構成単位Bが複数種含まれる場合はその合計含有量)は、重合体Yの全質量に対して、0.1~20質量%が好ましく、0.1~15質量%がより好ましく、0.1~10質量%が更に好ましい。なお、重合体Yにおける構成単位Bの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認できる。
The structural unit B contained in the polymer Y may be one type or two or more types.
The content of the structural unit B in the polymer Y (when a plurality of types of the structural unit B are contained, the total content thereof) is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer Y. 1 to 15% by mass is more preferable, and 0.1 to 10% by mass is further preferable. The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit B in the polymer Y can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
≪塩基性基を有する構成単位C≫
 重合体Yは、塩基性基を有する構成単位Cを含む。
 上記塩基性基としては、具体的には、脂肪族アミノ基、芳香族アミノ基、及び含窒素複素芳香環基等の窒素原子を有する基が挙げられ、脂肪族アミノ基が好ましい。
 脂肪族アミノ基としては、第一級アミノ基、第二級アミノ基、及び第三級アミノ基のいずれであってもよいが、解像性の点から、第二級アミノ基、又は第三級アミノ基が好ましい。
<< Structural unit C having a basic group >>
The polymer Y contains a structural unit C having a basic group.
Specific examples of the basic group include groups having a nitrogen atom such as an aliphatic amino group, an aromatic amino group, and a nitrogen-containing heteroaromatic ring group, and an aliphatic amino group is preferable.
The aliphatic amino group may be any of a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, and a tertiary amino group, but from the viewpoint of resolvability, it may be a secondary amino group or a tertiary amino group. A secondary amino group is preferred.
 塩基性基を有する構成単位を形成する単量体としては、具体的には、メタクリル酸1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2-(ジメチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、アクリル酸2,2,6,6-テトラメチル-4-ピペリジル、メタクリル酸2-(ジエチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2-(ジメチルアミノ)エチル、アクリル酸2-(ジエチルアミノ)エチル、メタクリル酸N-(3-ジメチルアミノ)プロピル、アクリル酸N-(3-ジメチルアミノ)プロピル、メタクリル酸N-(3-ジエチルアミノ)プロピル、アクリル酸N-(3-ジエチルアミノ)プロピル、メタクリル酸2-(ジイソプロピルアミノ)エチル、メタクリル酸2-モルホリノエチル、アクリル酸2-モルホリノエチル、N-[3-(ジメチルアミノ)プロピル]アクリルアミド、4-アミノスチレン、4-ビニルピリジン、2-ビニルピリジン、3-ビニルピリジン、1-ビニルイミダゾール、2-メチル-1-ビニルイミダゾール、1-アリルイミダゾール、及び1-ビニル-1,2,4-トリアゾール等が挙げられる。なかでも、メタクリル酸1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジルが好ましい。 Specific examples of the monomer forming a structural unit having a basic group include 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, and acrylic methacrylic acid. Acid 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl, methacrylic acid 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl, acrylic acid 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidyl, 2- (Diethylamino) ethyl methacrylate, 2- (dimethylamino) ethyl acrylate, 2- (diethylamino) ethyl acrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-dimethylamino) acrylate Propyl, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl methacrylate, N- (3-diethylamino) propyl acrylate, 2- (diisopropylamino) ethyl methacrylate, 2-morpholinoethyl methacrylate, 2-morpholinoethyl acrylate, N- [3- (Dimethylamino) propyl] acrylamide, 4-aminostyrene, 4-vinylpyridine, 2-vinylpyridine, 3-vinylpyridine, 1-vinylimidazole, 2-methyl-1-vinylimidazole, 1-allylimidazole, And 1-vinyl-1,2,4-triazole and the like. Of these, 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate is preferred.
 重合体Yに含まれる構成単位Cは、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体Yにおける構成単位Cの含有量(構成単位Cが複数種含まれる場合はその合計含有量)は、重合体Yの全質量に対して、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~5質量%がより好ましい。なお、重合体Yにおける構成単位Cの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認できる。
The structural unit C contained in the polymer Y may be only one type or two or more types.
The content of the structural unit C in the polymer Y (when a plurality of types of the structural unit C are contained, the total content thereof) is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, based on the total mass of the polymer Y. 01 to 5% by mass is more preferable. The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit C in the polymer Y can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from the 13 C-NMR measurement.
≪その他の構成単位≫
 重合体Yは、その他の構成単位を含んでいてもよい。
 以下において、重合体Yが含み得るその他の構成単位について述べる。
 ・酸基を有する構成単位D
 重合体Yは、酸基を有する構成単位Dを含んでいてもよい。酸基を有する構成単位Dとしては、上述した重合体X中に含まれる酸基を有する構成単位Dと同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
≪Other building blocks≫
The polymer Y may contain other structural units.
In the following, other structural units that the polymer Y may contain will be described.
-Constituent unit D having an acid group
The polymer Y may contain a structural unit D having an acid group. The structural unit D having an acid group has the same meaning as the structural unit D having an acid group contained in the polymer X described above, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
 重合体Yが構成単位Dを含む場合、重合体Yにおける構成単位Dの含有量(構成単位Dが複数種含まれる場合はその合計含有量)は、重合体Yの全質量に対して、例えば、0.1質量%以上である。また、その上限値は特に制限されないが、例えば、10質量%以下であり、1.0質量%以下が好ましい。なお、重合体Yにおける構成単位Dの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認できる。 When the polymer Y contains the structural unit D, the content of the structural unit D in the polymer Y (if a plurality of types of the structural unit D are contained, the total content thereof) is, for example, the total mass of the polymer Y. , 0.1% by mass or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 10% by mass or less, preferably 1.0% by mass or less. The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit D in the polymer Y can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
 ・構成単位E
 重合体Yは、既述の構成単位A、構成単位B、構成単位C、及び構成単位D以外のその他の構成単位Eを含んでいてもよい。構成単位Eとしては、上述した重合体X中に含まれる構成単位Eと同義であり、好適態様も同じである。
・ Structural unit E
The polymer Y may include the above-mentioned structural unit A, the structural unit B, the structural unit C, and other structural units E other than the structural unit D. The structural unit E has the same meaning as the structural unit E contained in the polymer X described above, and the preferred embodiment is also the same.
 重合体Yに含まれる構成単位Eは、1種のみであっても、2種以上であってもよい。
 重合体Yが構成単位Eを含む場合、重合体Yにおける構成単位Eの含有量(構成単位Eが複数種含まれる場合はその合計含有量)は、重合体Yの全質量に対して、90質量%以下が好ましく、85質量%以下がより好ましく、80質量%以下が更に好ましい。下限値としては、10質量%以上が好ましく、20質量%以上がより好ましい。上記範囲であると、解像度及び密着性がより向上する。なお、重合体Yにおける構成単位Eの含有量(含有割合:質量比)は、13C-NMR測定から常法により算出されるピーク強度の強度比により確認できる。
The structural unit E contained in the polymer Y may be only one type or two or more types.
When the polymer Y contains the structural unit E, the content of the structural unit E in the polymer Y (or the total content when a plurality of types of the structural units E are contained) is 90 with respect to the total mass of the polymer Y. It is preferably mass% or less, more preferably 85% by mass or less, and even more preferably 80% by mass or less. As the lower limit value, 10% by mass or more is preferable, and 20% by mass or more is more preferable. Within the above range, the resolution and adhesion are further improved. The content (content ratio: mass ratio) of the structural unit E in the polymer Y can be confirmed by the intensity ratio of the peak intensity calculated by a conventional method from 13 C-NMR measurement.
(特定重合体の重量平均分子量)
 特定重合体の重量平均分子量は、ポリスチレン換算重量平均分子量で、60,000以下であるのが好ましい。特定重合体の重量平均分子量が60,000以下である場合、感光性転写部材を転写する際、低温(例えば130℃以下)での転写を実現することができる。
 また、特定重合体の重量平均分子量は、現像残渣抑制の観点から、2,000~60,000が好ましく、3,000~50,000がより好ましく、10,000~40,000が特に好ましい。
 特定重合体の数平均分子量と重量平均分子量との比(分散度)は、1.0~5.0が好ましく、1.05~3.5がより好ましい。
(Weight average molecular weight of specific polymer)
The weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably a polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight of 60,000 or less. When the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is 60,000 or less, transfer at a low temperature (for example, 130 ° C. or less) can be realized when transferring the photosensitive transfer member.
The weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 2,000 to 60,000, more preferably 3,000 to 50,000, and particularly preferably 10,000 to 40,000 from the viewpoint of suppressing the development residue.
The ratio (dispersity) of the number average molecular weight and the weight average molecular weight of the specific polymer is preferably 1.0 to 5.0, more preferably 1.05 to 3.5.
(特定重合体の製造方法)
 特定重合体は、公知の手法により合成できる。
(Method for producing a specific polymer)
The specific polymer can be synthesized by a known method.
(感光性樹脂層中における各構成単位の含有量)
 感光性樹脂層中、上記3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bの含有量は、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、8.0μmol/g以上であり、露光後の引き置きによるパターン線幅の変動がより少ない点で、12.0μmol/g以上が好ましい。また、その上限値は、700.0μmol/g以下であり、形成されるパターンの解像性がより優れる点で、480.0μmol/g以下が好ましい。
 なお、上記3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bの含有量は、感光性樹脂層(g)中に含まれる上記構成単位Bの含有量の合計(μmol)を意味する。例えば、感光性樹脂層が重合体X及び重合体Yの一方のみを含む場合は、含まれる重合体中の構成単位Bの含有量を意味し、感光性樹脂層が重合体X及び重合体Yの両方を含む場合、重合体X中の構成単位B及び重合体Y中の構成単位Bの合計含有量を意味する。
(Content of each structural unit in the photosensitive resin layer)
In the photosensitive resin layer, the content of the structural unit B having the ether skeleton of the 3-membered ring or the 4-membered ring is 8.0 μmol / g or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, and after exposure. 12.0 μmol / g or more is preferable in that the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement is smaller. The upper limit thereof is 700.0 μmol / g or less, and 480.0 μmol / g or less is preferable in that the resolution of the formed pattern is more excellent.
The content of the structural unit B having the ether skeleton of the 3-membered ring or the 4-membered ring means the total content (μmol) of the structural unit B contained in the photosensitive resin layer (g). For example, when the photosensitive resin layer contains only one of the polymer X and the polymer Y, it means the content of the structural unit B in the contained polymer, and the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X and the polymer Y. When both of the above are included, it means the total content of the structural unit B in the polymer X and the structural unit B in the polymer Y.
 また、感光性樹脂層中、塩基性基を有する構成単位Cと後述する塩基性化合物の合計含有量は、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、形成されるパターンの解像性がより優れる点で、3.0μmol/g以上が好ましく、10.0μmol/g以上がより好ましい。また、その上限値としては、感度がより優れる点で、100.0μmol/g以下が好ましく、60.0μmol/g以下がより好ましい。
 なお、塩基性基を有する構成単位Cと後述する塩基性化合物の合計含有量を計算する際に際して、塩基性基を有する構成単位C及び塩基性化合物の一方が含まれていない場合は、その含まれていない成分量は0として計算する。
Further, the total content of the structural unit C having a basic group and the basic compound described later in the photosensitive resin layer is more excellent in the resolution of the formed pattern with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. In terms of points, 3.0 μmol / g or more is preferable, and 10.0 μmol / g or more is more preferable. Further, as the upper limit value, 100.0 μmol / g or less is preferable, and 60.0 μmol / g or less is more preferable, because the sensitivity is more excellent.
When calculating the total content of the structural unit C having a basic group and the basic compound described later, if one of the structural unit C having a basic group and the basic compound is not included, it is included. The amount of non-existent components is calculated as 0.
 また、感光性樹脂層は、酸基を有する構成単位を含む重合体及び後述する酸基を有する低分子化合物の含有量が少ないほど好ましい。これらの成分は、重合体X及び重合体Y中に含まれる構成単位B中の3員環又は4員環状のエポキシ骨格と不要に反応するためである。感光性樹脂層中における上記成分の含有量を低減することで、重合体X及び重合体Y中に含まれる構成単位B中の3員環又は4員環状のエポキシ骨格との反応を抑制でき、露光後の引き置きによるパターン線幅の変動をより小さくできる。
 感光性樹脂層中、酸基を有する構成単位と後述する酸基を有する低分子化合物の合計含有量は、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、100.0μmol/g以下であることが好ましい。
 なお、酸基を有する構成単位の含有量は、感光性樹脂層(g)中に含まれる上記構成単位の含有量の合計(μmol)を意味する。例えば、感光性樹脂層が上記構成単位を有する重合体を1種含む場合、上記重合体中に含まれる酸基を有する構成単位の含有量を意味する。また、感光性樹脂層が上記構成単位を有する重合体を複数種含む場合、上記複数種の重合体中に含まれる酸基を有する構成単位の合計含有量を意味する。
 また、酸基を有する低分子化合物と、酸基を有する構成単位を含む重合体中に含まれる上記酸基を有する構成単位との合計含有量を計算する際に際して、酸基を有する低分子化合物と、酸基を有する構成単位を含む重合体中に含まれる上記酸基を有する構成単位の一方が含まれていない場合は、その含まれていない成分量は0として計算する。
 また、上述した特定重合体が酸基を有する構成単位Dを含む場合、この特定重合体は、「酸基を有する構成単位を含む重合体」に該当する。
Further, it is preferable that the photosensitive resin layer has a small content of a polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group and a low molecular weight compound having an acid group described later. This is because these components unnecessarily react with the 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring epoxy skeleton in the structural unit B contained in the polymer X and the polymer Y. By reducing the content of the above components in the photosensitive resin layer, the reaction with the 3-membered ring or 4-membered cyclic epoxy skeleton in the structural unit B contained in the polymer X and the polymer Y can be suppressed. The fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement after exposure can be made smaller.
The total content of the structural unit having an acid group and the low molecular weight compound having an acid group described later in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 100.0 μmol / g or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. ..
The content of the structural unit having an acid group means the total content (μmol) of the structural unit contained in the photosensitive resin layer (g). For example, when the photosensitive resin layer contains one kind of polymer having the above-mentioned structural unit, it means the content of the structural unit having an acid group contained in the above-mentioned polymer. When the photosensitive resin layer contains a plurality of types of polymers having the above-mentioned structural units, it means the total content of the structural units having an acid group contained in the above-mentioned plurality of types of polymers.
Further, when calculating the total content of the low molecular weight compound having an acid group and the structural unit having an acid group contained in the polymer containing the structural unit having an acid group, the low molecular weight compound having an acid group When one of the above-mentioned structural units having an acid group contained in the polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group is not contained, the amount of the component not contained is calculated as 0.
Further, when the above-mentioned specific polymer contains a structural unit D having an acid group, this specific polymer corresponds to "a polymer containing a structural unit having an acid group".
 感光性樹脂層は、特定重合体以外のその他の重合体を更に含んでいてもよい。
 上記感光性樹脂層がその他の重合体を含む場合、その他の重合体の含有量は、特定重合体とその他の重合体の合計含有量に対して、50質量%以下が好ましく、30質量%以下がより好ましく、20質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 その他の重合体としては、例えばポリヒドロキシスチレンが挙げられる。ポリヒドロキシスチレンの市販品としては、SMA 1000P、SMA 2000P、SMA 3000P、SMA 1440F、SMA 17352P、SMA 2625P、及びSMA 3840F(以上、サートマー社製)、ARUFON UC-3000、ARUFON UC-3510、ARUFON UC-3900、ARUFON UC-3910、ARUFON UC-3920、及びARUFON UC-3080(以上、東亞合成(株)製)、並びに、Joncryl 690、Joncryl 678、Joncryl 67、及びJoncryl 586(以上、BASF社製)等が挙げられる。
The photosensitive resin layer may further contain other polymers other than the specific polymer.
When the photosensitive resin layer contains other polymers, the content of the other polymers is preferably 50% by mass or less, preferably 30% by mass or less, based on the total content of the specific polymer and the other polymers. Is more preferable, and 20% by mass or less is further preferable.
Examples of other polymers include polyhydroxystyrene. Commercially available products of polyhydroxystyrene include SMA 1000P, SMA 2000P, SMA 3000P, SMA 1440F, SMA 17352P, SMA 2625P, and SMA 3840F (all manufactured by Sartmer), ARUFON UC-3000, ARUFON UC-3510, ARUFON UC. -3900, ARUFON UC-3910, ARUFON UC-3920, and ARUFON UC-3080 (all manufactured by Toa Synthetic Co., Ltd.), and Jonclyl 690, Jonclyl 678, Jonclyl 67, and Jonclyl 586 (above, BA) And so on.
 特定重合体は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 感光性樹脂層における特定重合体の含有量(複数種含まれる場合はその合計含有量)としては、感度及び解像度がより優れる点で、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、70質量%以上が好ましく、形成されるパターンの解像性がより優れる点で、80質量%以上がより好ましい。その上限値としては特に制限されないが、例えば、99質量%以下が好ましく、98質量%以下がより好ましい。
The specific polymer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the specific polymer in the photosensitive resin layer (the total content when a plurality of types are contained) is 70% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer in that the sensitivity and resolution are more excellent. Is preferable, and 80% by mass or more is more preferable in that the resolution of the formed pattern is more excellent. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but for example, 99% by mass or less is preferable, and 98% by mass or less is more preferable.
<光酸発生剤>
 感光性樹脂層は、光酸発生剤を含む。
 光酸発生剤としては、紫外線、遠紫外線、X線、及び電子線等の活性光線の照射により酸を発生できる化合物である。
 光酸発生剤としては、波長300nm以上(好ましくは波長300~450nm)の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、その化学構造は制限されない。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光酸発生剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく使用できる。
 光酸発生剤としては、pKaが4以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が好ましく、pKaが3以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤がより好ましく、pKaが2以下の酸を発生する光酸発生剤が更に好ましい。pKaの下限値としては特に制限されないが、例えば、-10.0以上が好ましい。
 また、光酸発生剤は、露光後の引き置きによるパターン線幅の変動がより少ない点で、炭素数1~4のアルキルスルホン酸を発生する光酸発生剤、及び/又は、アリールスルホン酸を発生する光酸発生剤を含むことが好ましい。
<Photoacid generator>
The photosensitive resin layer contains a photoacid generator.
The photoacid generator is a compound capable of generating an acid by irradiation with active rays such as ultraviolet rays, far ultraviolet rays, X-rays, and electron beams.
As the photoacid generator, a compound that is sensitive to active light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more (preferably a wavelength of 300 to 450 nm) and generates an acid is preferable, but its chemical structure is not limited. Further, a photoacid generator that is not directly sensitive to active light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more can be used as a sensitizer if it is a compound that is sensitive to active light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. Can be preferably used in combination.
As the photoacid generator, a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less is preferable, a photoacid generator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less is more preferable, and a light that generates an acid having a pKa of 2 or less is preferable. Acid generators are more preferred. The lower limit of pKa is not particularly limited, but is preferably -10.0 or higher, for example.
Further, the photoacid generator is a photoacid generator that generates an alkyl sulfonic acid having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and / or an aryl sulfonic acid in that the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to leaving after exposure is smaller. It is preferable to include a photoacid generator that is generated.
 光酸発生剤としては、イオン性光酸発生剤及び非イオン性光酸発生剤のいずれであってもよい。
 イオン性光酸発生剤としては、例えば、ジアリールヨードニウム塩類及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩類等のオニウム塩化合物、並びに、第四級アンモニウム塩類等が挙げられる。これらのうち、オニウム塩化合物が好ましく、トリアリールスルホニウム塩類及びジアリールヨードニウム塩類がより好ましい。
 また、イオン性光酸発生剤としては、特開2014-085643号公報の段落0114~段落0133に記載のイオン性光酸発生剤も好ましい。
 非イオン性光酸発生剤としては、例えば、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、イミドスルホネート化合物、及びオキシムスルホネート化合物等が挙げられる。これらのなかでも、感度、解像度、及び密着性がより優れる点で、オキシムスルホネート化合物が好ましい。
The photoacid generator may be either an ionic photoacid generator or a nonionic photoacid generator.
Examples of the ionic photoacid generator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts. Of these, onium salt compounds are preferable, and triarylsulfonium salts and diaryliodonium salts are more preferable.
Further, as the ionic photoacid generator, the ionic photoacid generator described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-085643 is also preferable.
Examples of the nonionic photoacid generator include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, oxime sulfonate compounds and the like. Among these, the oxime sulfonate compound is preferable in that it is more excellent in sensitivity, resolution, and adhesion.
 なお、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、及びイミドスルホネート化合物の具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0083~段落0088に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the trichloromethyl-s-triazines, the diazomethane compound, and the imide sulfonate compound include the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP2011-221494.
 また、オキシムスルホネート化合物の具体例としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0084~段落0088に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the oxime sulfonate compound include the compounds described in paragraphs 0084 to 0088 of International Publication No. 2018/179640.
 光酸発生剤としては、感度及び解像度の点から、オニウム塩化合物、及びオキシムスルホネート化合物からなる群より選ばれる1種以上の化合物が好ましく、オキシムスルホネート化合物がより好ましい。
 また、光酸発生剤としては、下記構造の光酸発生剤も好ましい。
As the photoacid generator, one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of onium salt compounds and oxime sulfonate compounds are preferable, and oxime sulfonate compounds are more preferable, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution.
Further, as the photoacid generator, a photoacid generator having the following structure is also preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 光酸発生剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 感光性樹脂層における光酸発生剤の含有量(複数種含まれる場合はその合計含有量)としては、感度及び解像度がより優れる点で、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.1~10質量%が好ましく、0.5~5質量%がより好ましい。
The photoacid generator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the photoacid generator in the photosensitive resin layer (the total content when a plurality of types are contained) is 0.1 with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer in that the sensitivity and resolution are more excellent. It is preferably from 10% by mass, more preferably from 0.5 to 5% by mass.
<塩基性化合物>
 感光性樹脂層が重合体Xを含む場合、感光性樹脂層は塩基性化合物を含む。なお、感光性樹脂層が重合体Yを含む場合、感光性樹脂層は塩基性化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 なお、塩基性化合物には、上述した重合体は含まれない。
 塩基性化合物の分子量としては、2,000以下が好ましく、1,000以下がより好ましく、500以下が更に好ましく、400以下が特に好ましい。
 塩基性化合物としては、化学増幅レジストで用いられる塩基性化合物の中から任意に選択して使用でき、例えば、脂肪族アミン、芳香族アミン、複素環式アミン、第四級アンモニウムヒドロキシド、及びカルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩等が挙げられる。これらの具体例としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0204~段落0207に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 脂肪族アミンとしては、例えば、トリメチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、ジ-n-プロピルアミン、トリ-n-プロピルアミン、ジ-n-ペンチルアミン、トリ-n-ペンチルアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、ジシクロヘキシルアミン、及びジシクロヘキシルメチルアミン等が挙げられる。
 芳香族アミンとしては、例えば、アニリン、ベンジルアミン、N,N-ジメチルアニリン、及びジフェニルアミン等が挙げられる。
 複素環式アミンとしては、例えば、ピリジン、2-メチルピリジン、4-メチルピリジン、2-エチルピリジン、4-エチルピリジン、2-フェニルピリジン、4-フェニルピリジン、N-メチル-4-フェニルピリジン、4-ジメチルアミノピリジン、イミダゾール、ベンズイミダゾール、4-メチルイミダゾール、2-フェニルベンズイミダゾール、2,4,5-トリフェニルイミダゾール、ニコチン、ニコチン酸、ニコチン酸アミド、キノリン、8-オキシキノリン、ピラジン、ピラゾール、ピリダジン、プリン、ピロリジン、ピペリジン、ピペラジン、モルホリン、4-メチルモルホリン、1,5-ジアザビシクロ[4.3.0]-5-ノネン、及び1,8-ジアザビシクロ[5.3.0]-7-ウンデセン等が挙げられる。
 カルボン酸の第四級アンモニウム塩としては、例えば、テトラメチルアンモニウムアセテート、テトラメチルアンモニウムベンゾエート、テトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムアセテート、及びテトラ-n-ブチルアンモニウムベンゾエート等が挙げられる。
 また、塩基性化合物としては、N-シクロヘキシル-N’-[2-(4-モルホリニル)エチル]チオ尿素(CMTU)も好適に使用できる。また、CMTUの市販品としては、例えば、東洋化成工業(株)等から入手できる。
<Basic compound>
When the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X, the photosensitive resin layer contains a basic compound. When the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer Y, the photosensitive resin layer may contain a basic compound.
The basic compound does not include the above-mentioned polymer.
The molecular weight of the basic compound is preferably 2,000 or less, more preferably 1,000 or less, further preferably 500 or less, and particularly preferably 400 or less.
As the basic compound, an arbitrary selection can be used from the basic compounds used in the chemically amplified resist, and for example, aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, quaternary ammonium hydroxides, and carboxylic acids can be used. Examples include quaternary ammonium salts of acids. Specific examples of these include the compounds described in paragraphs 0204 to 0207 of JP-A-2011-22149, the contents of which are incorporated in the present specification.
Examples of the aliphatic amine include trimethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, di-n-propylamine, tri-n-propylamine, di-n-pentylamine, tri-n-pentylamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine and dicyclohexylamine. , And dicyclohexylmethylamine and the like.
Examples of the aromatic amine include aniline, benzylamine, N, N-dimethylaniline, diphenylamine and the like.
Examples of the heterocyclic amine include pyridine, 2-methylpyridine, 4-methylpyridine, 2-ethylpyridine, 4-ethylpyridine, 2-phenylpyridine, 4-phenylpyridine, N-methyl-4-phenylpyridine, and the like. 4-Dimethylaminopyridine, imidazole, benzimidazole, 4-methylimidazole, 2-phenylbenzimidazole, 2,4,5-triphenylimidazole, nicotine, nicotinic acid, nicotinic acid amide, quinoline, 8-oxyquinolin, pyrazine, Pyrazole, pyridazine, purine, pyrrolidine, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, 4-methylmorpholine, 1,5-diazabicyclo [4.3.0] -5-nonen, and 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.3.0]- 7-Undesen and the like can be mentioned.
Examples of the quaternary ammonium salt of the carboxylic acid include tetramethylammonium acetate, tetramethylammonium benzoate, tetra-n-butylammonium acetate, and tetra-n-butylammonium benzoate.
Further, as the basic compound, N-cyclohexyl-N'-[2- (4-morpholinyl) ethyl] thiourea (CMTU) can also be preferably used. Further, as a commercially available product of CMTU, for example, it can be obtained from Toyo Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd. and the like.
 塩基性化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 塩基性化合物の含有量については、既述のとおりである。
The basic compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the basic compound is as described above.
<酸基を有する低分子化合物>
 感光性樹脂層は、酸基を有する低分子化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 なお、酸基を有する低分子化合物とは、繰り返し単位を有していない非重合体を意図し、上述した重合体は含まれない。
 酸基を有する低分子化合物としては、2,000以下が好ましく、1,000以下がより好ましく、500以下が更に好ましく、400以下が特に好ましい。
 酸基とは、pKaが12以下のプロトン解離性基を意味する。
 上記酸基の定義は上述のとおりであり、具体的には、カルボキシ基、スルホンアミド基、ホスホン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性水酸基、及びスルホニルイミド基等が挙げられる。
 酸基を有する低分子化合物とは、例えば、安息香酸等が挙げられる。
<Low molecular weight compounds with acid groups>
The photosensitive resin layer may contain a low molecular weight compound having an acid group.
The low molecular weight compound having an acid group is intended to be a non-polymer having no repeating unit, and does not include the above-mentioned polymer.
The low molecular weight compound having an acid group is preferably 2,000 or less, more preferably 1,000 or less, further preferably 500 or less, and particularly preferably 400 or less.
The acid group means a proton dissociative group having a pKa of 12 or less.
The definition of the acid group is as described above, and specific examples thereof include a carboxy group, a sulfonamide group, a phosphonic acid group, a sulfo group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a sulfonylimide group.
Examples of the low molecular weight compound having an acid group include benzoic acid and the like.
 酸基を有する低分子化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 酸基を有する低分子化合物の含有量については、既述のとおりである。
The low molecular weight compound having an acid group may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the low molecular weight compound having an acid group is as described above.
<その他の添加剤>
 感光性樹脂層は、必要に応じて、その他の添加剤を含んでいてもよい。
 その他の添加剤としては、例えば、界面活性剤、可塑剤、増感剤、ヘテロ環状化合物、及びアルコキシシラン化合物等が挙げられ、厚さ均一性の点から、界面活性剤が好ましい。
<Other additives>
The photosensitive resin layer may contain other additives, if necessary.
Examples of other additives include surfactants, plasticizers, sensitizers, heterocyclic compounds, alkoxysilane compounds and the like, and surfactants are preferable from the viewpoint of thickness uniformity.
 界面活性剤としては、アニオン性界面活性剤、カチオン性界面活性剤、ノニオン性(非イオン性)界面活性剤、及び両性界面活性剤が挙げられ、ノニオン性界面活性剤が好ましい。
 ノニオン性界面活性剤としては、例えば、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレン高級アルキルフェニルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレングリコールの高級脂肪酸ジエステル類、シリコーン系界面活性剤、及びフッ素系界面活性剤が挙げられる。
Examples of the surfactant include anionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, nonionic (nonionic) surfactants, and amphoteric surfactants, and nonionic surfactants are preferable.
Examples of the nonionic surfactant include polyoxyethylene higher alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene higher alkylphenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene glycol higher fatty acid diesters, silicone-based surfactants, and fluorine-based surfactants. Can be mentioned.
 界面活性剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0120~段落0125に記載の界面活性剤も使用できる。
 また、界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、メガファックF-552、及び同F-554(以上、DIC(株)製)も使用できる。
 また、界面活性剤としては、特許第4502784号公報の段落0017、特開2009-237362号公報の段落0060~段落0071に記載の界面活性剤も使用できる。
As the surfactant, for example, the surfactant described in paragraphs 0120 to 0125 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can also be used.
Further, as commercially available surfactants, for example, Megafuck F-552 and F-554 (all manufactured by DIC Corporation) can also be used.
Further, as the surfactant, the surfactants described in paragraphs 0017 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraphs 0060 to 0071 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-237362 can also be used.
 界面活性剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 感光性樹脂層における界面活性剤の含有量(複数種含まれる場合はその合計含有量)としては、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.001~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~3質量%がより好ましい。
The surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the surfactant in the photosensitive resin layer (the total content when a plurality of types are contained) is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01, based on the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. ~ 3% by mass is more preferable.
 可塑剤、増感剤、ヘテロ環状化合物、及びアルコキシシラン化合物としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0097~段落0119に記載されたものが挙げられる。 Examples of the plasticizer, the sensitizer, the heterocyclic compound, and the alkoxysilane compound include those described in paragraphs 097 to 0119 of International Publication No. 2018/179640.
 更に、感光性樹脂層は、溶剤を含んでいてもよい。溶剤を含む感光性樹脂組成物により感光性樹脂層を形成した場合、溶剤が残留することもある。
 感光性樹脂層における溶剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対し、5質量%以下が好ましく、2質量%以下がより好ましく、1質量%以下が更に好ましく、0.5質量%以下が特に好ましく、0.1質量%以下が最も好ましい。
Further, the photosensitive resin layer may contain a solvent. When the photosensitive resin layer is formed by the photosensitive resin composition containing a solvent, the solvent may remain.
The content of the solvent in the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 2% by mass or less, further preferably 1% by mass or less, and 0.5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. Is particularly preferable, and 0.1% by mass or less is most preferable.
 また、感光性樹脂層は、その他の添加剤として、防錆剤、金属酸化物粒子、酸化防止剤、分散剤、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、導電性繊維、着色剤、熱ラジカル重合開始剤、熱酸発生剤、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、架橋剤、及び、有機又は無機の沈殿防止剤等の公知の添加剤を更に含んでいてもよい。
 これらの成分の好ましい態様については特開2014-85643号公報の段落0165~段落0184にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
In addition, the photosensitive resin layer has other additives such as a rust preventive, a metal oxide particle, an antioxidant, a dispersant, an acid growth agent, a development accelerator, a conductive fiber, a colorant, and a thermal radical polymerization initiator. , Thermoacid generators, UV absorbers, thickeners, cross-linking agents, and known additives such as organic or inorganic precipitation inhibitors may be further included.
Preferred embodiments of these components are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP2014-85643, respectively, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
<感光性樹脂層の平均厚さ>
 感光性樹脂層の平均厚さとしては、0.5~20μmが好ましい。感光性樹脂層の平均厚みが20μm以下であるとパターンの解像度がより優れ、感光性樹脂層の平均厚みが0.5μm以上であるとパターン直線性の点から好ましい。感光性樹脂層の平均厚さとしては、0.8~15μmがより好ましく、1.0~10μmが更に好ましい。
 なお、本明細書中、感光性転写部材中の各層の平均厚さは、転写部材の面方向に対し垂直な方向の断面を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)により観察して測定するものとする。また、平均厚さは、厚さを10点以上測定したときの平均値とする。
<Average thickness of photosensitive resin layer>
The average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is preferably 0.5 to 20 μm. When the average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is 20 μm or less, the resolution of the pattern is more excellent, and when the average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is 0.5 μm or more, the pattern linearity is preferable. The average thickness of the photosensitive resin layer is more preferably 0.8 to 15 μm, still more preferably 1.0 to 10 μm.
In the present specification, the average thickness of each layer in the photosensitive transfer member shall be measured by observing a cross section in a direction perpendicular to the surface direction of the transfer member with a scanning electron microscope (SEM). The average thickness is an average value when the thickness is measured at 10 points or more.
<感光性樹脂層の形成方法>
 感光性樹脂層は、感光性樹脂層の形成に用いる成分と、溶剤とを含む感光性樹脂組成物を調製し、塗布及び乾燥して形成できる。各成分を、それぞれ予め溶剤に溶解させた溶液とした後、得られた溶液を所定の割合で混合して組成物を調製することもできる。以上の如くして調製した組成物は、例えば、孔径0.2~30μmのフィルター等を用いて濾過されることが好ましい。
 感光性樹脂組成物を仮支持体又はカバーフィルム上に塗布し、乾燥させることで、感光性樹脂層を形成できる。
 塗布方法としては特に制限されず、スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、及びインクジェット塗布等の公知の方法が挙げられる。
 また、仮支持体又はカバーフィルム上に後述するその他の層を形成する場合、感光性樹脂層は、上記その他の層の上に形成されてもよい。
<Method of forming the photosensitive resin layer>
The photosensitive resin layer can be formed by preparing a photosensitive resin composition containing a component used for forming the photosensitive resin layer and a solvent, and applying and drying the photosensitive resin composition. It is also possible to prepare a composition by preparing a solution in which each component is previously dissolved in a solvent and then mixing the obtained solution at a predetermined ratio. The composition prepared as described above is preferably filtered using, for example, a filter having a pore size of 0.2 to 30 μm.
A photosensitive resin layer can be formed by applying the photosensitive resin composition on a temporary support or a cover film and drying it.
The coating method is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known methods such as slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, and inkjet coating.
Further, when the other layer described later is formed on the temporary support or the cover film, the photosensitive resin layer may be formed on the other layer.
(感光性樹脂組成物)
 感光性樹脂組成物は、感光性樹脂層の形成に用いる成分と、溶剤とを含むことが好ましい。各成分と溶剤とを混合して粘度を調節し、塗布及び乾燥することで、感光性樹脂層を好適に形成できる。
 感光性樹脂層の形成に用いる成分としては、既述の通りである。
 溶剤としては、公知の溶媒を使用でき、例えば、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0092~段落0094に記載された溶剤を使用できる。
(Photosensitive resin composition)
The photosensitive resin composition preferably contains a component used for forming the photosensitive resin layer and a solvent. A photosensitive resin layer can be suitably formed by mixing each component and a solvent, adjusting the viscosity, applying and drying.
The components used for forming the photosensitive resin layer are as described above.
As the solvent, a known solvent can be used, and for example, the solvent described in paragraphs 0092 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 can be used.
 また、特開2018-177889公報の段落0014に記載された20℃における蒸気圧が1kPa~16kPaの溶剤も好ましく使用できる。
 溶剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
Further, the solvent having a vapor pressure of 1 kPa to 16 kPa at 20 ° C. described in paragraph 0014 of JP-A-2018-1778889 can also be preferably used.
The solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 感光性樹脂組成物を塗布する際における溶剤の含有量は、感光性樹脂組成物中の全固形分100質量部に対し、50~1,900質量部が好ましく、100~900質量部がより好ましい。 The content of the solvent when the photosensitive resin composition is applied is preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content in the photosensitive resin composition. ..
〔その他の層〕
 感光性転写部材は、上述した感光性樹脂層以外のその他の層(以下、「その他の層」ともいう。)を含んでいてもよい。その他の層としては、例えば、コントラストエンハンスメント層、中間層、カバーフィルム、及び熱可塑性樹脂層等が挙げられ、公知のものを適宜採用することができる。
[Other layers]
The photosensitive transfer member may include other layers (hereinafter, also referred to as “other layers”) other than the above-mentioned photosensitive resin layer. Examples of the other layer include a contrast enhancement layer, an intermediate layer, a cover film, a thermoplastic resin layer, and the like, and known ones can be appropriately adopted.
 コントラストエンハンスメント層の好ましい態様については国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0134、熱可塑性樹脂層の好ましい態様については特開2014-085643号公報の段落0189~段落0193、及び、上記以外の他の層の好ましい態様については特開2014-085643号公報の段落0194~段落0196にそれぞれ記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 For preferred embodiments of the contrast enhancement layer, paragraph 0134 of International Publication No. 2018/179640, for preferred embodiments of the thermoplastic resin layer, paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP2014-085643, and other layers other than the above. The preferred embodiment of the above is described in paragraphs 0194 to 0196 of JP2014-085643, respectively, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
[感光性転写部材の製造方法]
 感光性転写部材の製造方法は、特に制限されず、公知の製造方法が適用できる。
 感光性転写部材の製造方法としては、仮支持体上に感光性樹脂組成物を塗布及び乾燥することによって感光性樹脂層を形成する工程を含むことが好ましく、上記感光性樹脂層を形成する工程の後に、さらに、上記感光性樹脂層上にカバーフィルムを配置する工程を含むことがより好ましい。
[Manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer member]
The method for producing the photosensitive transfer member is not particularly limited, and a known production method can be applied.
The method for producing the photosensitive transfer member preferably includes a step of forming a photosensitive resin layer by applying and drying the photosensitive resin composition on the temporary support, and a step of forming the photosensitive resin layer. After that, it is more preferable to further include a step of arranging the cover film on the photosensitive resin layer.
[樹脂パターンの製造方法、及び回路配線の製造方法]
 本発明の樹脂パターンの製造方法としては、上述した感光性転写部材を用いた樹脂パターンの製造方法であれば特に制限されないが、上述した感光性転写部材中の感光性樹脂層の仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を基板に接触させて、感光性転写部材と基板と貼り合わせる工程(以下、「貼り合わせ工程」ともいう。また、この貼り合わせを「転写」又は「ラミネート」ともいう。)と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(以下、「露光工程」ともいう。)と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像してパターンを形成する工程(以下、「現像工程」ともいう。)と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。
[Manufacturing method of resin pattern and manufacturing method of circuit wiring]
The method for producing the resin pattern of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is the method for producing the resin pattern using the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member, but the method is different from that of the temporary support side of the photosensitive resin layer in the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member. Is a step of bringing the surface on the opposite side into contact with the substrate and bonding the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate (hereinafter, also referred to as "bonding step", and this bonding is also referred to as "transfer" or "lamination"). A step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer (hereinafter, also referred to as "exposure step") and a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as "development step"). It is preferable to include (referred to) and in this order.
 本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、上述した感光性転写部材を用いる方法を含む形態であれば特に制限されないが、上述した感光性転写部材中の感光性樹脂層の仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を、導電層を有する基板中の導電層に接触させて、感光性転写部材と導電層を有する基板とを貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)と、貼り合わせた上記感光性転写部材における上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)と、パターン露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程(現像工程)と、上記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における上記導電層をエッチング処理する工程(以下、「エッチング工程」ということがある。)と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。 The method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it includes the method using the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member, but the side opposite to the temporary support side of the photosensitive resin layer in the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member. The step of bringing the surface of the above into contact with the conductive layer in the substrate having the conductive layer and bonding the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate having the conductive layer (bonding step), and the above-mentioned above in the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member which has been bonded. A step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer (exposure step), a step of developing the pattern-exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern (development step), and a region in which the resin pattern is not arranged. It is preferable to include a step of etching the conductive layer (hereinafter, may be referred to as an “etching step”) in this order.
 また、本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、上記貼り合わせ工程、上記露光工程、上記現像工程、及び上記エッチング工程の4工程を1セットとして、複数回繰り返す態様であることも好ましい。 Further, it is also preferable that the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention has a mode in which the four steps of the bonding step, the exposure step, the developing step, and the etching step are repeated a plurality of times as one set.
 なお、上記感光性樹脂層は、活性光線を照射していない部分を像として残すポジ型感光性樹脂層である。上記感光性樹脂層では、活性光線を照射することにより、例えば活性光線を照射されて酸を発生する感光剤等を用いて露光部の溶解性を高めるため、パターン露光時点では露光部及び未露光部がいずれも硬化せず、得られたパターン形状が不良であった場合には全面露光などによって基板を再利用(リワーク)できる。
 本発明の回路配線の製造方法の実施形態としては、国際公開第2006/190405号を参考にすることができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
The photosensitive resin layer is a positive photosensitive resin layer that leaves a portion not irradiated with active light as an image. In the above-mentioned photosensitive resin layer, by irradiating with active light, for example, a photosensitizer that generates acid by being irradiated with active light is used to increase the solubility of the exposed part. If none of the parts are cured and the obtained pattern shape is defective, the substrate can be reused (reworked) by full exposure or the like.
As an embodiment of the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring of the present invention, International Publication No. 2006/190405 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
〔貼り合わせ工程〕
 本発明の樹脂パターンの製造方法、及び本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、上述した感光性転写部材中の感光性樹脂層の仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を、基板又は導電層を有する基板の導電層に接触させて、感光性転写部材と基板又は導電層を有する基板とを貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 上記貼り合わせ工程においては、感光性転写部材と基板又は導電層を有する基板と、が接触するように圧着させることが好ましい。上記態様であると、露光及び現像後のパターン形成された感光性樹脂層を、導電層をエッチングする際のエッチングレジストとして好適に使用できる。
 上記基板又は導電層を有する基板と上記感光性転写部材とを圧着する方法としては、特に制限はなく、公知の転写方法、及びラミネート方法を適用できる。
 上記貼り合わせは、ロール等による加圧及び加熱することに行われることが好ましい。貼り合わせには、ラミネーター、真空ラミネーター、及び、オートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネーターを使用できる。
 特に、本発明の回路配線の製造方法においては、ロールツーロール方式により行われることが好ましく、このため、基板としては、樹脂フィルムが好ましい。
 以下において、ロールツーロール方式について説明する。
 ロールツーロール方式とは、基板として、巻き取り及び巻き出しが可能な基板を用い、本発明の回路配線の製造方法に含まれるいずれかの工程の前に、基板又は基板を含む構造体を巻き出す工程(「巻き出し工程」ともいう。)と、いずれかの工程の後に、基板又は基板を含む構造体を巻き取る工程(「巻き取り工程」ともいう。)と、を含み、少なくともいずれかの工程(好ましくは、全ての工程、又は加熱工程以外の全ての工程)を、基板又は基板を含む構造体を搬送しながら行う方式をいう。
 巻き出し工程における巻き出し方法、及び巻き取り工程における巻取り方法としては、特に制限されず、ロールツーロール方式を適用する製造方法において、公知の方法を用いればよい。
[Lasting process]
The method for manufacturing a resin pattern of the present invention and the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring of the present invention have a substrate or a conductive layer on the surface of the photosensitive resin layer in the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member opposite to the temporary support side. It is preferable to include a step (bonding step) of bringing the photosensitive transfer member into contact with the conductive layer of the substrate and bonding the substrate or the substrate having the conductive layer.
In the bonding step, it is preferable that the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate or the substrate having the conductive layer are pressure-bonded so as to be in contact with each other. In the above aspect, the patterned photosensitive resin layer after exposure and development can be suitably used as an etching resist when etching the conductive layer.
The method of crimping the substrate or the substrate having the conductive layer with the photosensitive transfer member is not particularly limited, and a known transfer method and laminating method can be applied.
The bonding is preferably performed by pressurizing and heating with a roll or the like. A known laminator such as a laminator, a vacuum laminator, and an auto-cut laminator can be used for bonding.
In particular, in the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring of the present invention, it is preferable to use a roll-to-roll method, and therefore, a resin film is preferable as the substrate.
The roll-to-roll method will be described below.
The roll-to-roll method uses a substrate that can be wound and unwound as a substrate, and winds the substrate or a structure including the substrate before any of the steps included in the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention. At least one of a step of unwinding (also referred to as “unwinding step”) and a step of winding up the substrate or a structure including the substrate (also referred to as “winding step”) after any of the steps. (Preferably, all steps or all steps other than the heating step) are performed while transporting the substrate or the structure including the substrate.
The unwinding method in the unwinding step and the winding method in the winding step are not particularly limited, and a known method may be used in the manufacturing method to which the roll-to-roll method is applied.
 感光性転写部材が貼り合わされる上記基板(以後、「基板A」ともいう。)、及び感光性転写部材が貼り合わされる導電層を有する基板(以後、「基板B」ともいう。)に含まれる基板としては、ガラス基板、シリコン基板、及び樹脂フィルムが好ましい。
 基板A及び基板Bは透明であることが好ましい。
 基板A及び基板Bの屈折率は、1.50~1.52であることが好ましい。
 基板A及び基板Bは、ガラス基板等の透光性基板で構成されていてもよく、例えば、コーニング社のゴリラガラスに代表される強化ガラス等も使用できる。また、基板A及び基板Bに含まれる材料としては、特開2010-086684号公報、特開2010-152809号公報、及び特開2010-257492号公報に用いられている材料も好ましい。
 基板A及び基板Bとして樹脂フィルム基材を用いる場合、光学的な歪みが小さい及び/又は透明度が高い樹脂フィルムを使用することがより好ましい。具体的な素材としては、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)、ポリエチレンナフタレート、ポリカーボネート、トリアセチルセルロース、及びシクロオレフィンポリマー等が挙げられる。
It is included in the above-mentioned substrate to which the photosensitive transfer member is bonded (hereinafter, also referred to as "substrate A") and the substrate having a conductive layer to which the photosensitive transfer member is bonded (hereinafter, also referred to as "substrate B"). As the substrate, a glass substrate, a silicon substrate, and a resin film are preferable.
The substrate A and the substrate B are preferably transparent.
The refractive index of the substrate A and the substrate B is preferably 1.50 to 1.52.
The substrate A and the substrate B may be made of a translucent substrate such as a glass substrate, and for example, tempered glass typified by Corning's gorilla glass can also be used. Further, as the material contained in the substrate A and the substrate B, the materials used in JP-A-2010-086644, JP-A-2010-152809, and JP-A-2010-257492 are also preferable.
When a resin film base material is used as the substrate A and the substrate B, it is more preferable to use a resin film having a small optical distortion and / or a high transparency. Specific materials include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate, polycarbonate, triacetyl cellulose, cycloolefin polymer and the like.
 基板Bとしては、ロールツーロール方式で製造する点から、樹脂フィルムが好ましい。 As the substrate B, a resin film is preferable from the viewpoint of being manufactured by a roll-to-roll method.
 導電層としては、一般的な回路配線又はタッチパネル配線に用いられる任意の導電層が挙げられる。
 導電層としては、導電性及び細線形成性の点から、金属層、導電性金属酸化物層、グラフェン層、カーボンナノチューブ層、及び導電ポリマー層からなる群より選ばれる1種以上の層が好ましく、金属層がより好ましく、銅層又は銀層が更に好ましい。
 また、基板B上に配置される導電層は、1層であっても、2層以上であってもよい。導電層が2層以上配置される場合、互いに異なる材質の導電層であることが好ましい。
 導電層の材料としては、金属単体及び導電性金属酸化物等が挙げられる。
 金属単体としては、Al、Zn、Cu、Fe、Ni、Cr、Mo、Ag、及びAu等が挙げられる。
 導電性金属酸化物としては、ITO(Indium Tin Oxide)、IZO(Indium Zinc Oxide)、及びSiO等が挙げられる。なお、「導電性」とは、体積抵抗率が1×10Ωcm未満であることをいい、体積抵抗率が1×10Ωcm未満が好ましい。
Examples of the conductive layer include any conductive layer used for general circuit wiring or touch panel wiring.
As the conductive layer, one or more layers selected from the group consisting of a metal layer, a conductive metal oxide layer, a graphene layer, a carbon nanotube layer, and a conductive polymer layer are preferable from the viewpoint of conductivity and fine wire forming property. A metal layer is more preferable, and a copper layer or a silver layer is further preferable.
Further, the conductive layer arranged on the substrate B may be one layer or two or more layers. When two or more conductive layers are arranged, it is preferable that the conductive layers are made of different materials.
Examples of the material of the conductive layer include a single metal and a conductive metal oxide.
Examples of the metal simple substance include Al, Zn, Cu, Fe, Ni, Cr, Mo, Ag, and Au.
Examples of the conductive metal oxide include ITO (Indium Tin Oxide), IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide), SiO 2 and the like. “Conductivity” means that the volume resistivity is less than 1 × 10 6 Ωcm, and the volume resistivity is preferably less than 1 × 10 4 Ωcm.
 本発明の回路配線の製造方法において、複数の導電層を有する基板を用いる場合、複数の導電層のうち少なくとも一つの導電層は導電性金属酸化物を含むことが好ましい。
 導電層としては、静電容量型タッチパネルに用いられる視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン又は周辺取り出し部の配線であることが好ましい。
When a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers is used in the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring of the present invention, it is preferable that at least one of the plurality of conductive layers contains a conductive metal oxide.
As the conductive layer, it is preferable that the electrode pattern corresponds to the sensor of the visual recognition portion used in the capacitive touch panel or the wiring of the peripheral extraction portion.
〔露光工程〕
 本発明の樹脂パターンの製造方法及び本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、上記貼り合わせ工程後、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)を含むことが好ましい。
[Exposure process]
The method for producing a resin pattern of the present invention and the method for producing a circuit wiring of the present invention preferably include a step (exposure step) of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer after the bonding step.
 露光工程において、パターンの詳細な配置及び具体的サイズは特に制限されない。本発明の回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線を有する入力装置を備えた表示装置(例えばタッチパネル)の表示品質を高め、また、取り出し配線の占める面積をできるだけ小さくできる点から、パターンの少なくとも一部(特にタッチパネルの電極パターン及び取り出し配線の部分)は100μm以下の細線であることが好ましく、70μm以下の細線であることがより好ましい。 In the exposure process, the detailed arrangement and specific size of the pattern are not particularly limited. At least the pattern can be made from the viewpoint that the display quality of a display device (for example, a touch panel) provided with an input device having a circuit wiring manufactured by the circuit wiring manufacturing method of the present invention can be improved and the area occupied by the take-out wiring can be as small as possible. A part (particularly the electrode pattern of the touch panel and the portion of the take-out wiring) is preferably a thin wire of 100 μm or less, and more preferably 70 μm or less.
 露光に使用する光源としては、感光性樹脂層を露光可能な波長域の光(例えば、365nm、405nm等)を照射するものであれば、適宜選定し得る。具体的には、超高圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、メタルハライドランプ、及びLED(Light Emitting Diode)等が挙げられる。 The light source used for exposure can be appropriately selected as long as the photosensitive resin layer irradiates light in a wavelength range that can be exposed (for example, 365 nm, 405 nm, etc.). Specific examples thereof include ultra-high pressure mercury lamps, high pressure mercury lamps, metal halide lamps, and LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes).
 露光量としては、5~200mJ/cmが好ましく、10~100mJ/cmがより好ましい。 The exposure amount is preferably 5 ~ 200mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10 ~ 100mJ / cm 2.
 露光工程においては、感光性樹脂層から仮支持体を剥離した後にパターン露光してもよく、仮支持体を剥離する前に、仮支持体を介してパターン露光し、その後、仮支持体を剥離してもよい。感光性樹脂層とマスクとの接触によるマスク汚染の防止、及びマスクに付着した異物による露光への影響を避けるためには、仮支持体を剥離せずにパターン露光することが好ましい。なお、パターン露光は、マスクを介した露光でもよいし、レーザー等を用いたダイレクト露光でもよい。 In the exposure step, the temporary support may be peeled off from the photosensitive resin layer and then the pattern exposure may be performed. Before the temporary support is peeled off, the pattern is exposed through the temporary support, and then the temporary support is peeled off. You may. In order to prevent mask contamination due to contact between the photosensitive resin layer and the mask and to avoid the influence of foreign matter adhering to the mask on the exposure, it is preferable to perform pattern exposure without peeling off the temporary support. The pattern exposure may be an exposure through a mask or a direct exposure using a laser or the like.
〔現像工程〕
 本発明の樹脂パターンの製造方法及び本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、上記露光工程後、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程(現像工程)を含むことが好ましい。
[Development process]
The method for producing a resin pattern of the present invention and the method for producing a circuit wiring of the present invention may include a step (development step) of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern after the exposure step. preferable.
 上記現像工程における露光された上記感光性樹脂層の現像は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。
 現像液としては、感光性樹脂層の非画像部を除去することができれば特に制限はなく、例えば、特開平5-072724号公報に記載の現像液等、公知の現像液を使用できる。なお、現像液は感光性樹脂層の露光部(ポジ型)が溶解型の現像挙動をする現像液が好ましい。例えば、pKa=7~13の化合物を0.05~5mol/L(リットル)の濃度で含むアルカリ水溶液系の現像液が好ましい。現像液は、更に、水溶性の有機溶剤、及び界面活性剤等を含有してもよい。現像液としては、例えば、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落0194に記載の現像液が好ましい。
The exposed photosensitive resin layer in the developing step can be developed by using a developing solution.
The developing solution is not particularly limited as long as the non-image portion of the photosensitive resin layer can be removed, and a known developing solution such as the developing solution described in JP-A-5-07724 can be used. The developer is preferably a developer in which the exposed portion (positive type) of the photosensitive resin layer has a dissolution type development behavior. For example, an alkaline aqueous solution-based developer containing a compound having pKa = 7 to 13 at a concentration of 0.05 to 5 mol / L (liter) is preferable. The developer may further contain a water-soluble organic solvent, a surfactant and the like. As the developing solution, for example, the developing solution described in paragraph 0194 of International Publication No. 2015/093271 is preferable.
 現像方式としては特に制限はなく、パドル現像、シャワー現像、スピン現像、及びディップ現像等のいずれでもよい。ここで、シャワー現像について説明すると、露光後の感光性樹脂層に現像液をシャワーにより吹き付けることにより、露光部分を除去できる。また、現像の後に、洗浄剤等をシャワーにより吹き付け、ブラシ等で擦りながら、現像残渣を除去することも好ましい。現像液の液温度としては、20~40℃が好ましい。 The development method is not particularly limited, and any of paddle development, shower development, spin development, dip development, etc. may be used. Here, the shower development will be described. By spraying the developing solution on the photosensitive resin layer after exposure by a shower, the exposed portion can be removed. Further, after the development, it is also preferable to spray a cleaning agent or the like with a shower and rub with a brush or the like to remove the development residue. The liquid temperature of the developing solution is preferably 20 to 40 ° C.
 本発明の樹脂パターンの製造方法及び本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、更に、現像して得られた感光性樹脂層を含むパターンを加熱処理するポストベーク工程を有していてもよい。
 ポストベークは8.1~121.6kPaの環境下で行うことが好ましく、50.66kPa以上の環境下で行うことがより好ましい。一方、111.46kPa以下の環境下で行うことがより好ましく、101.3kPa以下の環境下で行うことが更に好ましい。
 ポストベークの温度は、80~250℃が好ましく、110~170℃がより好ましく、130~150℃が更に好ましい。
 ポストベークの時間は、1~30分が好ましく、2~10分がより好ましく、2~4分が更に好ましい。
 ポストベークは、空気環境下で行っても、窒素置換環境下で行ってもよい。
The method for producing a resin pattern of the present invention and the method for producing a circuit wiring of the present invention may further include a post-baking step of heat-treating a pattern containing a photosensitive resin layer obtained by development.
Post-baking is preferably performed in an environment of 8.1 to 121.6 kPa, and more preferably performed in an environment of 50.66 kPa or more. On the other hand, it is more preferably performed in an environment of 111.46 kPa or less, and further preferably performed in an environment of 101.3 kPa or less.
The temperature of the post-bake is preferably 80 to 250 ° C, more preferably 110 to 170 ° C, and even more preferably 130 to 150 ° C.
The post-baking time is preferably 1 to 30 minutes, more preferably 2 to 10 minutes, still more preferably 2 to 4 minutes.
Post-baking may be performed in an air environment or a nitrogen substitution environment.
 また、本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、後述のエッチング工程の前に、ポスト露光工程等のその他の工程を有していてもよい。 Further, the circuit wiring manufacturing method of the present invention may include other steps such as a post-exposure step before the etching step described later.
〔エッチング工程〕
 本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、上記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)を含むことが好ましい。
[Etching process]
The circuit wiring manufacturing method of the present invention preferably includes a step (etching step) of etching the conductive layer in the region where the resin pattern is not arranged.
 上記エッチング工程では、上記現像工程により上記感光性樹脂層から形成されたパターンを、エッチングレジストとして使用し、上記導電層のエッチング処理を行う。
 エッチング処理の方法としては、特開2010-152155号公報の段落0048~段落0054等に記載のウェットエッチングによる方法、及び、公知のプラズマエッチング等のドライエッチングによる方法等を適用できる。
In the etching step, the pattern formed from the photosensitive resin layer by the developing step is used as an etching resist, and the conductive layer is etched.
As a method of etching treatment, a method by wet etching described in paragraphs 0048 to 0054 of JP-A-2010-152155, a method by dry etching such as known plasma etching, and the like can be applied.
 例えば、エッチング処理の方法としては、一般的に行われている、エッチング液に浸漬するウェットエッチング法が挙げられる。ウェットエッチングに用いられるエッチング液は、エッチングの対象に合わせて酸性タイプ又はアルカリ性タイプのエッチング液を適宜選択すればよい。
 酸性タイプのエッチング液としては、塩酸、硫酸、フッ酸、及びリン酸等の酸性成分単独の水溶液、並びに、酸性成分と塩化第二鉄、フッ化アンモニウム、又は過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩との混合水溶液等が例示される。酸性成分は、複数の酸性成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
 アルカリ性タイプのエッチング液としては、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、アンモニア、有機アミン、及びテトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイド等の有機アミンの塩等のアルカリ成分単独の水溶液、並びに、アルカリ成分と過マンガン酸カリウム等の塩との混合水溶液等が例示される。アルカリ成分は、複数のアルカリ成分を組み合わせた成分を使用してもよい。
For example, as a method of etching treatment, a generally used wet etching method of immersing in an etching solution can be mentioned. As the etching solution used for wet etching, an acidic type or alkaline type etching solution may be appropriately selected according to the etching target.
Examples of the acidic type etching solution include an aqueous solution of an acidic component alone such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, hydrofluoric acid, and phosphoric acid, and an acidic component and a salt such as ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride, or potassium permanganate. A mixed aqueous solution and the like are exemplified. As the acidic component, a component in which a plurality of acidic components are combined may be used.
As the alkaline type etching solution, an aqueous solution of an alkaline component alone such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, an organic amine, and a salt of an organic amine such as tetramethylammonium hydroxide, and an alkaline component and potassium permanganate A mixed aqueous solution with a salt such as, etc. is exemplified. As the alkaline component, a component in which a plurality of alkaline components are combined may be used.
 エッチング液の温度は特に制限されないが、45℃以下が好ましい。本発明の回路配線の製造方法において、エッチングマスク(エッチングパターン)として使用される樹脂パターンは、45℃以下の温度域における酸性及びアルカリ性のエッチング液に対して特に優れた耐性を発揮することが好ましい。したがって、エッチング工程中に感光性樹脂層が剥離することが防止され、感光性樹脂層の存在しない部分が選択的にエッチングされることになる。
 エッチング工程後、工程ラインの汚染を防ぐために、必要に応じて、エッチング処理された基板を洗浄する洗浄工程、及び、洗浄された基板を乾燥する乾燥工程を行ってもよい。
The temperature of the etching solution is not particularly limited, but is preferably 45 ° C. or lower. In the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring of the present invention, the resin pattern used as an etching mask (etching pattern) preferably exhibits particularly excellent resistance to acidic and alkaline etching solutions in a temperature range of 45 ° C. or lower. .. Therefore, the photosensitive resin layer is prevented from peeling off during the etching step, and the portion where the photosensitive resin layer does not exist is selectively etched.
After the etching step, in order to prevent contamination of the process line, a cleaning step of cleaning the etched substrate and a drying step of drying the cleaned substrate may be performed, if necessary.
〔除去工程〕
 本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、樹脂パターンを除去する工程(除去工程)を含むことが好ましい。
 除去工程は、特に制限はなく、必要に応じて行うことができるが、エッチング工程の後に行うことが好ましい。
 残存する樹脂パターンを除去する方法としては特に制限はないが、薬品処理により除去する方法が挙げられ、除去液を使用する方法が好ましい。
 樹脂パターンの除去方法としては、30~80℃(好ましくは50~80℃)にて撹拌中の除去液に樹脂パターンを有する基板を1~30分間浸漬する方法が挙げられる。
[Removal process]
The circuit wiring manufacturing method of the present invention preferably includes a step (removal step) of removing the resin pattern.
The removing step is not particularly limited and can be performed as needed, but it is preferably performed after the etching step.
The method for removing the remaining resin pattern is not particularly limited, but examples thereof include a method for removing by chemical treatment, and a method using a removing liquid is preferable.
Examples of the method for removing the resin pattern include a method of immersing the substrate having the resin pattern in the removing liquid being stirred at 30 to 80 ° C. (preferably 50 to 80 ° C.) for 1 to 30 minutes.
 除去液としては、例えば、無機アルカリ成分又は有機アルカリ成分を水、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン、又はこれらの混合溶液に溶解させた除去液が挙げられる。なお、無機アルカリ成分としては、水酸化ナトリウム、及び水酸化カリウム等が挙げられる。有機アルカリ成分としては、第1級アミン化合物、第2級アミン化合物、第3級アミン化合物、及び第4級アンモニウム塩化合物等が挙げられる。
 また、除去液を使用し、スプレー法、シャワー法、及びパドル法等により除去してもよい。
Examples of the removing solution include a removing solution in which an inorganic alkaline component or an organic alkaline component is dissolved in water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or a mixed solution thereof. Examples of the inorganic alkaline component include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide and the like. Examples of the organic alkali component include a primary amine compound, a secondary amine compound, a tertiary amine compound, and a quaternary ammonium salt compound.
Further, the removing liquid may be used and removed by a spray method, a shower method, a paddle method or the like.
〔樹脂パターンの全面露光工程〕
 上記除去工程の前に、上記樹脂パターンを全面露光する工程(以下、「全面露光工程」ともいう。)を含むことが好ましい。更に必要に応じて、全面露光した上記樹脂パターンを加熱する工程(以下、「加熱工程」ともいう。)を含んでもよい。全面露光工程及び加熱工程は、エッチング工程後かつ除去工程前に行われることが好ましい。
 エッチング工程の後に、エッチングマスクとして使用した上記樹脂パターンを全面露光することにより、除去液への溶解性及び除去液の浸透性が向上し、除去液を長時間使用した場合においても除去性に優れる。また、更に、加熱工程を含む場合、加熱工程により、光酸発生剤の反応速度、及び、発生した酸とポジ型感光性樹脂との反応速度をより向上することができ、結果、除去性能が向上する。
[Full exposure process of resin pattern]
Prior to the removal step, it is preferable to include a step of exposing the entire surface of the resin pattern (hereinafter, also referred to as a "full exposure step"). Further, if necessary, a step of heating the resin pattern exposed to the entire surface (hereinafter, also referred to as “heating step”) may be included. The full exposure step and the heating step are preferably performed after the etching step and before the removing step.
By exposing the entire surface of the resin pattern used as an etching mask after the etching step, the solubility in the removal solution and the permeability of the removal solution are improved, and the removal property is excellent even when the removal solution is used for a long time. .. Further, when the heating step is included, the reaction rate of the photoacid generator and the reaction rate of the generated acid and the positive photosensitive resin can be further improved by the heating step, and as a result, the removal performance is improved. improves.
 全面露光工程における露光に使用する光源としては、特に制限はなく、公知の露光光源を使用できる。除去性の点から、上記露光工程と同じ波長の光を含む光源を使用することが好ましい。 The light source used for exposure in the full exposure process is not particularly limited, and a known exposure light source can be used. From the viewpoint of removability, it is preferable to use a light source containing light having the same wavelength as that in the exposure step.
 全面露光工程における露光量としては、除去性の点から、5~1,000mJ/cmが好ましく、10~800mJ/cmがより好ましく、100~500mJ/cmが更に好ましい。 The exposure amount in the overall exposure step, from the viewpoint of removability, preferably 5 ~ 1,000mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10 ~ 800mJ / cm 2, more preferably 100 ~ 500mJ / cm 2.
 全面露光工程における露光量としては、除去性の点から、上記露光工程における露光量以上であることが好ましく、上記露光工程における露光量よりも多いことがより好ましい。 From the viewpoint of removability, the exposure amount in the entire surface exposure step is preferably equal to or more than the exposure amount in the above exposure step, and more preferably larger than the exposure amount in the above exposure step.
〔その他の工程〕
 本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、上述した以外の任意の工程(その他の工程)を含んでもよい。例えば、以下のような工程が挙げられるが、これらの工程に制限されない。
 また、本発明の回路配線の製造方法が含み得る露光工程、現像工程、及びその他の工程の例としては、特開2006-023696号公報の段落0035~段落0051に記載の方法も好適に用いることができる。
[Other processes]
The circuit wiring manufacturing method of the present invention may include any steps (other steps) other than those described above. For example, the following steps can be mentioned, but the steps are not limited to these steps.
Further, as an example of the exposure step, the developing step, and other steps that can be included in the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention, the methods described in paragraphs 0035 to 0051 of JP-A-2006-023696 are also preferably used. Can be done.
<カバーフィルム剥離工程>
 本発明の樹脂パターンの製造方法及び本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、感光性転写部材がカバーフィルムを有する場合、上記感光性転写部材のカバーフィルムを剥離する工程(以下、「カバーフィルム剥離工程」ともいう。)を含むことが好ましい。カバーフィルムを剥離する方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を適用できる。
<Cover film peeling process>
The method for producing a resin pattern of the present invention and the method for producing a circuit wiring of the present invention are a step of peeling the cover film of the photosensitive transfer member when the photosensitive transfer member has a cover film (hereinafter, "cover film peeling step"). It is also preferable to include.). The method for peeling the cover film is not particularly limited, and a known method can be applied.
<可視光線反射率を低下させる工程>
 本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、基板上の複数の導電層の一部又は全ての可視光線反射率を低下させる処理をする工程を含んでいてもよい。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、酸化処理が挙げられる。例えば、銅を酸化処理して酸化銅とすることで、黒化することにより、導電層の可視光線反射率を低下させることができる。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理の好ましい態様については、特開2014-150118号公報の段落0017~段落0025、並びに、特開2013-206315号公報の段落0041、段落0042、段落0048及び段落0058に記載があり、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Step to reduce visible light reflectance>
The method for manufacturing a circuit wiring of the present invention may include a step of reducing the visible light reflectance of a part or all of a plurality of conductive layers on a substrate.
Examples of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment. For example, the visible light reflectance of the conductive layer can be reduced by blackening the copper by oxidizing it to obtain copper oxide.
Preferable embodiments of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance are described in paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-150118, and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-206315. There is a description, and the contents of this publication are incorporated herein by reference.
<絶縁膜を形成する工程、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程>
 本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、形成した回路配線上に絶縁膜を形成する工程と、絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程と、を含むことも好ましい。
 この新たな導電層に対して、再度、上記貼り合わせ工程、上記露光工程、上記現像工程、及び上記エッチング工程の4工程を実施することで、さらに、第二の導電パターンを形成できる。つまり、このような構成により、基板上に、第二の導電パターンを第一の導電パターンと互いに絶縁しつつ、形成できる。
 絶縁膜を形成する工程の手順については、特に制限はなく、公知の永久膜を形成する方法が挙げられる。また、絶縁性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの絶縁膜を形成してもよい。
 絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程の手順については、特に制限はない。導電性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの新たな導電層を形成してもよい。
<Step of forming an insulating film, step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film>
The method for manufacturing a circuit wiring of the present invention preferably includes a step of forming an insulating film on the formed circuit wiring and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film.
A second conductive pattern can be further formed by performing the four steps of the bonding step, the exposure step, the developing step, and the etching step again on the new conductive layer. That is, with such a configuration, the second conductive pattern can be formed on the substrate while being insulated from the first conductive pattern.
The procedure of the step of forming the insulating film is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a known method of forming a permanent film. Further, an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having an insulating property.
The procedure of the process of forming a new conductive layer on the insulating film is not particularly limited. A new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
 本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、両方の表面にそれぞれ複数の導電層を有する基板を用い、両方の表面に形成された導電層に対して逐次又は同時に回路形成することも好ましい。このような構成により、基板の一方の表面に第一の導電パターン、もう一方の表面に第二の導電パターンを形成したタッチパネル用回路配線を形成できる。また、このような構成のタッチパネル用回路配線を、ロールツーロールで基材の両面から形成することも好ましい。 In the circuit wiring manufacturing method of the present invention, it is also preferable to use a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces and to form circuits sequentially or simultaneously on the conductive layers formed on both surfaces. With such a configuration, a touch panel circuit wiring having a first conductive pattern formed on one surface of the substrate and a second conductive pattern formed on the other surface can be formed. It is also preferable to form the touch panel circuit wiring having such a configuration from both sides of the base material by roll-to-roll.
 本発明の回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線は、種々の装置に適用できる。本発明の回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線を備えた装置としては、例えば、入力装置等が挙げられ、タッチパネルが好ましく、静電容量型タッチパネルがより好ましい。また、上記入力装置は、有機EL表示装置及び液晶表示装置等の表示装置にも適用できる。 The circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention can be applied to various devices. Examples of the device provided with the circuit wiring manufactured by the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention include an input device and the like, and a touch panel is preferable, and a capacitance type touch panel is more preferable. The input device can also be applied to display devices such as organic EL display devices and liquid crystal display devices.
[タッチパネルの製造方法]
 本発明のタッチパネルの製造方法は、上述した感光性転写部材を用いる方法を含む態様であれば特に制限されないが、上述した感光性転写部材中の感光性樹脂層の仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を、導電層を有する基板中の導電層に接触させて、感光性転写部材と導電層を有する基板とを貼り合わせる工程(貼り合わせ工程)と、上記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程(露光工程)と、露光された上記感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程(現像工程)と、上記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における上記導電層をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)と、をこの順に含むことが好ましい。
[Manufacturing method of touch panel]
The method for manufacturing the touch panel of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it includes the method using the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member, but is on the side opposite to the temporary support side of the photosensitive resin layer in the above-mentioned photosensitive transfer member. A step of bringing the surface into contact with the conductive layer in the substrate having the conductive layer to bond the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate having the conductive layer (bonding step), and a step of pattern-exposing the photosensitive resin layer (the step of pattern exposure). The exposure step), the step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern (development step), and the step of etching the conductive layer in the region where the resin pattern is not arranged (etching step). ) And, are preferably included in this order.
 本発明のタッチパネルの製造方法における、各工程の具体的な態様、及び各工程を行う順序等の実施態様については、上述の「回路配線の製造方法」の項において説明した通りであり、好ましい態様も同様である。
 本発明のタッチパネルの製造方法としては、上述した態様以外の構成は、公知のタッチパネルの製造方法を参照できる。
 また、本発明のタッチパネルの製造方法は、上述した工程以外の任意の工程(その他の工程)を含んでもよい。
In the touch panel manufacturing method of the present invention, specific aspects of each step and embodiments such as the order in which each step is performed are as described in the above-mentioned "Circuit wiring manufacturing method", which is a preferable embodiment. Is the same.
As a method for manufacturing a touch panel of the present invention, a known method for manufacturing a touch panel can be referred to for configurations other than those described above.
Further, the method for manufacturing a touch panel of the present invention may include an arbitrary step (other steps) other than the above-mentioned steps.
 図2及び図3に、本発明のタッチパネルの製造方法において用いられるマスクのパターンの一例を示す。
 図2に示されるパターンA、及び図3に示されるパターンBにおいて、SL及びGは、非画像部(遮光部)であり、DLは、アライメント合わせの枠を仮想的に示したものである。本発明のタッチパネルの製造方法において、例えば、図2に示されるパターンAを有するマスクを介して感光性樹脂層を露光することで、SL及びGに対応するパターンAを有する回路配線が形成されたタッチパネルを製造できる。具体的には、国際公開第2016/190405号の図1に記載の方法で作製できる。製造されたタッチパネルの一例においては、Gは透明電極(タッチパネル用電極)が形成される部分であり、SLは周辺取出し部の配線が形成される部分である。
2 and 3 show an example of a mask pattern used in the method for manufacturing a touch panel of the present invention.
In the pattern A shown in FIG. 2 and the pattern B shown in FIG. 3, SL and G are non-image parts (light-shielding parts), and DL is a virtual representation of the alignment frame. In the method for manufacturing a touch panel of the present invention, for example, by exposing the photosensitive resin layer through a mask having the pattern A shown in FIG. 2, a circuit wiring having the pattern A corresponding to SL and G was formed. Can manufacture touch panels. Specifically, it can be produced by the method shown in FIG. 1 of International Publication No. 2016/190405. In an example of the manufactured touch panel, G is a portion where a transparent electrode (touch panel electrode) is formed, and SL is a portion where wiring of a peripheral take-out portion is formed.
 本発明のタッチパネルの製造方法により製造されたタッチパネルは、透明基板と、電極と、絶縁層又は保護層とを有することが好ましい。
 上記タッチパネルにおける検出方法としては、抵抗膜方式、静電容量方式、超音波方式、電磁誘導方式、及び光学方式等公知の方式いずれでもよい。なかでも、静電容量方式が好ましい。
 タッチパネル型としては、いわゆる、インセル型(例えば、特表2012-517051号公報の図5、図6、図7、図8に記載のもの)、いわゆる、オンセル型(例えば、特開2013-168125号公報の図19に記載のもの、特開2012-089102号公報の図1及び図5に記載のもの)、OGS(One Glass Solution)型、TOL(Touch-on-Lens)型(例えば、特開2013-054727号公報の図2に記載のもの)、その他の構成(例えば、特開2013-164871号公報の図6に記載のもの)、及び、各種アウトセル型(いわゆる、GG、G1・G2、GFF、GF2、GF1、G1Fなど)等が挙げられる。
The touch panel manufactured by the method for manufacturing a touch panel of the present invention preferably has a transparent substrate, electrodes, and an insulating layer or a protective layer.
The detection method on the touch panel may be any known method such as a resistive film method, a capacitance method, an ultrasonic method, an electromagnetic induction method, and an optical method. Of these, the capacitance method is preferable.
The touch panel type includes a so-called in-cell type (for example, those shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 7, and 8 of JP-A-2012-517501), a so-called on-cell type (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-168125). The one described in FIG. 19 of the publication, the one described in FIGS. 1 and 5 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-081022), OGS (One Glass Solution) type, TOR (Touch-on-Lens) type (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. (See FIG. 2 of 2013-054727), other configurations (for example, those shown in FIG. 6 of JP2013-164871), and various out-selling types (so-called GG, G1 and G2, GFF, GF2, GF1, G1F, etc.) and the like.
 以下に実施例に基づいて本発明をさらに詳細に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り適宜変更することができる。したがって、本発明の範囲は以下に示す実施例により限定的に解釈されるべきものではない。 The present invention will be described in more detail below based on examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, treatment contents, treatment procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should not be construed as limiting by the examples shown below.
[実施例1~19及び比較例1~5の感光性転写部材の作製及び評価]
〔感光性樹脂組成物の各種成分〕
<重合体>
 表2に示される重合体(重合体A-1~A-19)は、後述する重合体A-1の合成方法(合成例3)に準じて合成したものを用いた。
[Preparation and Evaluation of Photosensitive Transfer Members of Examples 1 to 19 and Comparative Examples 1 to 5]
[Various components of photosensitive resin composition]
<Polymer>
As the polymers (polymers A-1 to A-19) shown in Table 2, those synthesized according to the method for synthesizing polymer A-1 described later (Synthesis Example 3) were used.
 表1に、重合体A-1~A-19を構成するモノマーの種類を示す。なお、表1中の各重合体A-1~A-19において、各モノマーの含有量は質量%を意図する。
 また、表1中、「エーテル価(μmol/g)」とは、重合体中の3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bの含有量(μmol/g)を表す。
 また、表1中、「アミン価(μmol/g)」とは、重合体中の塩基性基を有する構成単位Cの含有量(μmol/g)を表す。
 また、表1中、「酸価(μmol/g)」とは、重合体中の酸基を有する構成単位Dの含有量(μmol/g)を表す。
Table 1 shows the types of monomers constituting the polymers A-1 to A-19. In each of the polymers A-1 to A-19 in Table 1, the content of each monomer is intended to be mass%.
Further, in Table 1, the "ether value (μmol / g)" represents the content (μmol / g) of the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the polymer.
Further, in Table 1, the "amine value (μmol / g)" represents the content (μmol / g) of the structural unit C having a basic group in the polymer.
Further, in Table 1, the "acid value (μmol / g)" represents the content (μmol / g) of the structural unit D having an acid group in the polymer.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000009
 表1中に示される各略語は、以下のとおりである。
 ATHF:2-テトラヒドロフラニルアクリレート(後述する合成方法(合成例1)により合成したものを使用した。)
 MAEVE:1-エトキシエチルメタクリレート(和光純薬工業(株)製)
 MATHP:テトラヒドロ-2H-ピラン-2-イルメタクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製)
 MATHF:2-テトラヒドロフラニルメタクリレート(後述する合成方法(合成例2)により合成したものを使用した。)
 AA:アクリル酸(富士フイルム和光純薬工業(株)製)
 GMA:メタクリル酸グリシジル(富士フイルム和光純薬工業(株)製)
 OXE-30:(3-エチルオキセタン-3-イル)メチルメタクリレート(大阪有機化学工業(株)製)
 M-100:サイクロマーM-100(ダイセル(株)製)
 PMPMA:メタクリル酸1,2,2,6,6-ペンタメチル-4-ピペリジル(富士フイルム和光純薬工業(株)製)
 DMAEA:アクリル酸2-(ジメチルアミノ)エチル(富士フイルム和光純薬工業(株)製)
 CHA:アクリル酸シクロヘキシル(富士フイルム和光純薬工業(株)製)
 MMA:メタクリル酸メチル(富士フイルム和光純薬工業(株)製)
 EA:アクリル酸エチル(富士フイルム和光純薬工業(株)製)
The abbreviations shown in Table 1 are as follows.
THF: 2-Tetrahydrofuranyl acrylate (The one synthesized by the synthesis method described later (Synthesis Example 1) was used.)
MAEVE: 1-ethoxyethyl methacrylate (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
MATHP: Tetrahydro-2H-pyran-2-ylmethacrylate (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
MATTH: 2-Tetrahydrofuranyl methacrylate (the one synthesized by the synthesis method described later (Synthesis Example 2) was used.)
AA: Acrylic acid (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
GMA: Glycidyl methacrylate (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
OXE-30: (3-ethyloxetane-3-yl) methyl methacrylate (manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
M-100: Cyclomer M-100 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation)
PMPMA: 1,2,2,6,6-pentamethyl-4-piperidyl methacrylate (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
DMAEA: 2- (Dimethylamino) ethyl acrylate (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
CHA: Cyclohexyl acrylate (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
MMA: Methyl methacrylate (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
EA: Ethyl acrylate (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
 ≪合成例1:ATHFの合成方法≫
 3つ口フラスコにアクリル酸(72.1g、1.0mol)、ヘキサン(72.1g)を加え20℃に冷却した。カンファースルホン酸(7.0mg、0.03mmol)、2-ジヒドロフラン(77.9g、1.0mol)を滴下した後に、20℃±2℃で1.5時間撹拌した後、35℃まで昇温して2時間攪拌した。ヌッチェにキョーワード200(ろ過材、水酸化アルミニウム粉末、協和化学工業(株)製)、キョーワード1000(ろ過材、ハイドロタルサイト系粉末、協和化学工業(株)製)の順に敷き詰めた後、反応液をろ過することでろ過液を得た。得られたろ過液にヒドロキノンモノメチルエーテル(MEHQ、1.2mg)を加えた後、40℃で減圧濃縮することで、アクリル酸テトラヒドロフラン-2-イル(ATHF)140.8gを無色油状物として得た(収率99.0%)。
<< Synthesis Example 1: ATHF Synthesis Method >>
Acrylic acid (72.1 g, 1.0 mol) and hexane (72.1 g) were added to the three-necked flask and cooled to 20 ° C. After adding camphorsulfonic acid (7.0 mg, 0.03 mmol) and 2-dihydrofuran (77.9 g, 1.0 mol), the mixture was stirred at 20 ° C. ± 2 ° C. for 1.5 hours and then heated to 35 ° C. And stirred for 2 hours. After laying Kyoward 200 (filter material, aluminum hydroxide powder, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and Kyoward 1000 (filter material, hydrotalcite powder, manufactured by Kyowa Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) on Nutche in this order, The reaction solution was filtered to obtain a filtrate. Hydroquinone monomethyl ether (MEHQ, 1.2 mg) was added to the obtained filtrate and then concentrated under reduced pressure at 40 ° C. to obtain 140.8 g of tetrahydrofuran-2-yl acrylate (ATHF) as a colorless oil. (Yield 99.0%).
 ≪合成例2:MATHFの合成方法≫
 アクリル酸(72.1g、1.0mol)をメタアクリル酸(86.1g、1.0mol)に変更した以外は、上述した合成例1と同様の方法により、メタクリル酸テトラヒドロフラン-2-イル(MATHF)を合成した。
<< Synthesis example 2: MATTH synthesis method >>
Tetrahydrofuran methacrylate (MATHV) by the same method as in Synthesis Example 1 described above, except that acrylic acid (72.1 g, 1.0 mol) was changed to methacrylic acid (86.1 g, 1.0 mol). ) Was synthesized.
 ≪合成例3:重合体A-1の合成例≫
 3つ口フラスコにPGMEA(75.0g)を入れ、窒素雰囲気下において90℃に昇温した。ATHF(27.0g)、GMA(1.0g)、PMPMA(1.0g)、CHA(60.0g)、EA(11.0g)、V-601(4.0g)、及びPGMEA(75.0g)を加えた溶液を、90℃±2℃に維持した3つ口フラスコ溶液中に2時間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後,90℃±2℃にて2時間撹拌することで、重合体A-1(固形分濃度40.0質量%)を得た。重合体A-1の重量平均分子量は、GPC法によりポリスチレン換算値として、27,000であった。
<< Synthesis Example 3: Synthesis Example of Polymer A-1 >>
PGMEA (75.0 g) was placed in a three-necked flask, and the temperature was raised to 90 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere. ATHF (27.0 g), GMA (1.0 g), PMPMA (1.0 g), CHA (60.0 g), EA (11.0 g), V-601 (4.0 g), and PGMEA (75.0 g) ) Was added dropwise to a three-necked flask solution maintained at 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. over 2 hours. After completion of the dropping, the mixture was stirred at 90 ° C. ± 2 ° C. for 2 hours to obtain polymer A-1 (solid content concentration: 40.0% by mass). The weight average molecular weight of the polymer A-1 was 27,000 as a polystyrene-equivalent value by the GPC method.
 なお、合成例3において記載する各略語は、以下のとおりである。
 PGMEA:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(昭和電工(株)製)
 V-601:ジメチル 2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオネート)(富士フイルム和光純薬工業(株)製)
The abbreviations described in Synthesis Example 3 are as follows.
PGMEA: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (manufactured by Showa Denko KK)
V-601: Dimethyl 2,2'-azobis (2-methylpropionate) (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
 重合体A-2~A-19についても、表1に示すモノマー種に変更した以外は、重合体A-1と同様の方法により合成した。なお、重合体A-2~A-19の合成においても、重合体の固形分濃度は40質量%とした。なお、重合体A-2~A-19の重量平均分子量は、GPC法によりポリスチレン換算値として、19,000~31,000の範囲であった。表1中に、重合体A-2~A-19の各重量平均分子量を示す。 Polymers A-2 to A-19 were also synthesized by the same method as polymer A-1, except that the monomer species shown in Table 1 were changed. Also in the synthesis of the polymers A-2 to A-19, the solid content concentration of the polymer was set to 40% by mass. The weight average molecular weight of the polymers A-2 to A-19 was in the range of 19,000 to 31,000 in terms of polystyrene by the GPC method. Table 1 shows the weight average molecular weights of the polymers A-2 to A-19.
<光酸発生剤>
 表2に示される光酸発生剤(B-1~B-4)を以下に示す。
 B-1:下記構造の光酸発生剤(特開2013-047765号公報の段落0227に記載の方法に従って合成した)。
<Photoacid generator>
The photoacid generators (B-1 to B-4) shown in Table 2 are shown below.
B-1: A photoacid generator having the following structure (synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0227 of JP2013-047765A).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 B-2:PAG103(商品名、BASF社製:下記構造の光酸発生剤) B-2: PAG103 (trade name, manufactured by BASF: photoacid generator with the following structure)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 B-3:下記構造の光酸発生剤(特開2014-197155号公報の段落0210に記載の方法に従って合成した) B-3: Photoacid generator having the following structure (synthesized according to the method described in paragraph 0210 of JP2014-197155A)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
 B-4:GSID-26-1(商品名、BASF社製:下記構造の光酸発生剤)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
B-4: GSID-26-1 (trade name, manufactured by BASF: a photoacid generator having the following structure)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
<塩基性化合物>
 表2に示される塩基性化合物(D-1、D-2)を以下に示す。
 D-1:下記構造の塩基性化合物
<Basic compound>
The basic compounds (D-1, D-2) shown in Table 2 are shown below.
D-1: Basic compound having the following structure
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 D-2: トリオクチルアミン(東京化成工業(株)製) D-2: Trioctylamine (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
<界面活性剤>
 表2に示される界面活性剤(C-1)を以下に示す。
<Surfactant>
The surfactants (C-1) shown in Table 2 are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
<酸基を有する低分子化合物>
 表2に示される酸基を有する低分子化合物は、以下のとおりである。
 安息香酸(東京化成工業(株)製)
<Low molecular weight compounds with acid groups>
The low molecular weight compounds having an acid group shown in Table 2 are as follows.
Benzoic acid (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
<その他の低分子化合物>
 表2に示されるベンゼンスルホンアミドは、以下のとおりである。
 ベンゼンスルホンアミド(東京化成工業(株)製)
<Other low molecular weight compounds>
The benzenesulfonamides shown in Table 2 are as follows.
Benzene sulfonamide (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
〔感光性樹脂組成物の調製〕
 表2に示す固形分比(なお、表2における各成分の数値の単位は、質量部である。)となるように、重合体、光酸発生剤、塩基性化合物、界面活性剤、ベンゼンスルホンアミド、及び安息香酸をPGMEAに固形分濃度10質量%になるように溶解混合し、孔径0.2μmのポリテトラフルオロエチレン製フィルターで濾過して、実施例及び比較例の感光性樹脂組成物を調製した。
[Preparation of photosensitive resin composition]
Polymers, photoacid generators, basic compounds, surfactants, and benzenesulfons so that the solid content ratios shown in Table 2 (the unit of numerical value of each component in Table 2 is parts by mass). Amid and benzoic acid are dissolved and mixed in PGMEA so as to have a solid content concentration of 10% by mass, filtered through a filter made of polytetrafluoroethylene having a pore size of 0.2 μm, and the photosensitive resin compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples are obtained. Prepared.
〔感光性転写部材の作製〕
 得られた感光性樹脂組成物を、仮支持体となる厚さ30μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルムの上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて乾燥膜厚が3.0μm、塗布幅が1.0mとなるように塗布した。その後、80℃の乾燥ゾーンを40秒間かけて通過させ、最後にカバーフィルムとしてポリエチレンフィルム(トレデガー社製、OSM-N)を圧着して感光性転写部材を作製した。
 なお、上記PETフィルムの全光ヘイズは0.19%であった。フィルムヘイズはスガ試験機(株)製ヘイズメーターHZ-2を用い、JIS-K-7136に準拠してベース小片の全光ヘイズ値(%)を測定した。
[Preparation of photosensitive transfer member]
The obtained photosensitive resin composition was placed on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 30 μm as a temporary support using a slit-shaped nozzle to obtain a dry film thickness of 3.0 μm and a coating width of 1.0 m. It was applied so as to become. Then, it was passed through a drying zone at 80 ° C. for 40 seconds, and finally a polyethylene film (OSM-N manufactured by Tredegar) was pressure-bonded as a cover film to prepare a photosensitive transfer member.
The total light haze of the PET film was 0.19%. For the film haze, a haze meter HZ-2 manufactured by Suga Test Instruments Co., Ltd. was used, and the total light haze value (%) of the base small piece was measured according to JIS-K-7136.
〔性能評価〕
<導電層を有する基板>
 導電層を有する基板としては、厚さ188μmのポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)フィルム上に、スパッタ法によって厚さ500nmの銅層を積層して作製した、銅層付きPET基板を使用した。
[Performance evaluation]
<Substrate with conductive layer>
As the substrate having a conductive layer, a PET substrate with a copper layer prepared by laminating a copper layer having a thickness of 500 nm on a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film having a thickness of 188 μm was used.
<感度評価>
 作製した感光性転写部材を巻き出した後、ラミロール温度120℃、線圧1.0MPa、線速度0.5m/min.のラミネート条件で、上述した銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。その際、カバーフィルムを剥がして、感光性転写部材中の感光性樹脂層が銅層と接触するように、ラミネートを実施した。仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅10μmのラインアンドスペースパターンマスク(Duty比 1:1)を介して超高圧水銀灯で露光後、2時間引き置いた後に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。現像は25℃の1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、シャワー現像で30秒行った。
 上記方法にて10μmのラインアンドスペースパターンを形成したとき、スペース部の残渣を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)により観察して、完全に残渣がなくなる露光量を求めた。得られた露光量を下記評価基準に基づいて評価した。なお、実用上、評価が「3」以上(つまり、露光量が200mJ/cm未満)が好ましい。
 「5」:80mJ/cm未満
 「4」:80mJ/cm以上150mJ/cm未満
 「3」:150mJ/cm以上200mJ/cm未満
 「2」:200mJ/cm以上300mJ/cm未満
 「1」:300mJ/cm以上
<Sensitivity evaluation>
After unwinding the prepared photosensitive transfer member, the lamirol temperature was 120 ° C., the linear pressure was 1.0 MPa, and the linear velocity was 0.5 m / min. It was laminated on the PET substrate with a copper layer described above under the above-mentioned laminating conditions. At that time, the cover film was peeled off, and lamination was performed so that the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member was in contact with the copper layer. After exposure with an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp via a line-and-space pattern mask (duty ratio 1: 1) having a line width of 10 μm without peeling the temporary support, the temporary support was left for 2 hours and then peeled and developed. Development was carried out by shower development for 30 seconds using a 1.0% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 25 ° C.
When a 10 μm line-and-space pattern was formed by the above method, the residue in the space portion was observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM) to determine the exposure amount at which the residue was completely eliminated. The obtained exposure amount was evaluated based on the following evaluation criteria. In practice, it is preferable that the evaluation is "3" or more (that is, the exposure amount is less than 200 mJ / cm 2 ).
"5": 80mJ / cm less than 2 "4": 80mJ / cm 2 or more 150mJ / cm less than 2 "3": 150mJ / cm 2 or more 200mJ / cm less than 2 "2": 200mJ / cm 2 or more 300mJ / cm 2 Less than "1": 300mJ / cm 2 or more
<引き置き時間依存性の評価>
 作製した感光性転写部材を巻き出した後、ラミロール温度120℃、線圧1.0MPa、線速度0.5m/min.のラミネート条件で、上述した銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。その際、カバーフィルムを剥がして、感光性転写部材中の感光性樹脂層が銅層と接触するように、ラミネートを実施した。仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅10μmのラインアンドスペースパターンマスク(Duty比 1:1)を介して、上述した感度評価にて残渣がなくなった露光量で露光した後、24時間引き置いた。引き置き後、仮支持体を剥離して現像した。現像は25℃の1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、シャワー現像で30秒行った。
 得られたラインアンドスペースパターンの線幅を走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)により観察し、10μmからの線幅の変動を下記評価基準に基づいて評価した。なお、実用上、評価が「3」以上(つまり、10μmからの線幅の変動が1.5μm未満である)ことが好ましい。
<Evaluation of detention time dependence>
After unwinding the prepared photosensitive transfer member, the lamirol temperature was 120 ° C., the linear pressure was 1.0 MPa, and the linear velocity was 0.5 m / min. It was laminated on the PET substrate with a copper layer described above under the above-mentioned laminating conditions. At that time, the cover film was peeled off, and lamination was performed so that the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member was in contact with the copper layer. After exposing with a line-and-space pattern mask (duty ratio 1: 1) having a line width of 10 μm without peeling the temporary support at an exposure amount at which no residue was left in the sensitivity evaluation described above, the mixture was left to stand for 24 hours. .. After leaving, the temporary support was peeled off and developed. Development was carried out by shower development for 30 seconds using a 1.0% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 25 ° C.
The line width of the obtained line-and-space pattern was observed with a scanning electron microscope (SEM), and the variation of the line width from 10 μm was evaluated based on the following evaluation criteria. In practice, it is preferable that the evaluation is "3" or more (that is, the fluctuation of the line width from 10 μm is less than 1.5 μm).
 「5」:0.5μm未満
 「4」:0.5μm以上、1.0μm未満
 「3」:1.0μm以上、1.5μm未満
 「2」:1.5μm以上、3μm未満
 「1」:3μm以上
"5": less than 0.5 μm "4": 0.5 μm or more and less than 1.0 μm “3”: 1.0 μm or more and less than 1.5 μm “2”: 1.5 μm or more and less than 3 μm “1”: 3 μm that's all
<配線の解像度評価>
 作製した感光性転写部材を、ロール温度120℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度1.0m/min.のラミネート条件で、上述した銅層付きPET基板にラミネートした。その際、カバーフィルムを剥がして、感光性転写部材中の感光性樹脂層が銅層と接触するように、ラミネートを実施した。
 仮支持体を剥離せずに線幅3~20μmのラインアンドスペースパターンマスク(Duty比 1:1)を介して超高圧水銀灯で露光後、2時間引き置いた後に仮支持体を剥離して現像した。現像は25℃の1.0%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用い、シャワー現像で30秒行った。
 次いで25℃の銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をディップ法にて60秒間エッチングした。
 上記エッチング後、残った感光性樹脂層を50℃の剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用い、シャワーで剥離した。
 このように得られたラインアンドスペースパターン(パターン状銅層)で、最も高解像度であったパターンを到達解像度とした。また到達解像度を判断する際、パターンの側壁部に荒れが生じている場合には、解像できていないとした。下記評価基準により、到達解像度を評価した。なお、実用上、評価が「3」以上であることが好ましい。
<Evaluation of wiring resolution>
The prepared photosensitive transfer member was subjected to a roll temperature of 120 ° C., a linear pressure of 0.8 MPa, and a linear velocity of 1.0 m / min. It was laminated on the PET substrate with a copper layer described above under the above-mentioned laminating conditions. At that time, the cover film was peeled off, and lamination was performed so that the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member was in contact with the copper layer.
After exposure with an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp via a line-and-space pattern mask (duty ratio 1: 1) with a line width of 3 to 20 μm without peeling the temporary support, the temporary support is peeled off and developed after being left for 2 hours. did. Development was carried out by shower development for 30 seconds using a 1.0% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 25 ° C.
Next, the copper layer was etched by a dip method for 60 seconds using a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) at 25 ° C.
After the above etching, the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off by a shower using a stripping solution at 50 ° C. (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.).
In the line-and-space pattern (patterned copper layer) obtained in this way, the pattern having the highest resolution was defined as the ultimate resolution. In addition, when determining the ultimate resolution, if the side wall of the pattern is rough, it is said that resolution has not been achieved. The ultimate resolution was evaluated according to the following evaluation criteria. In practice, it is preferable that the evaluation is "3" or higher.
 「5」:4μm未満
 「4」:4μm以上、5μm未満
 「3」:5μm以上、6μm未満
 「2」:6μm以上、7μm未満
 「1」:7μm以上
"5": less than 4 μm "4": 4 μm or more and less than 5 μm “3”: 5 μm or more and less than 6 μm “2”: 6 μm or more and less than 7 μm “1”: 7 μm or more
 以下、表2を示す。
 また、表2中、「エーテル価(μmol/g)」欄において、「重合体中における含有量」とは、重合体中の3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bの含有量(μmol/g)を表す。また、「感光性樹脂層における含有量」とは、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対する3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bの含有量(μmol/g)を表す。
 また、表2中、「アミン価(μmol/g)」欄において、「重合体中における含有量」とは、重合体中の塩基性基を有する構成単位Cの含有量(μmol/g)を表す。また、「感光性樹脂層における含有量」とは、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対する塩基性基を有する構成単位Cの含有量(μmol/g)と塩基性化合物の含有量(μmol/g)の合計含有量を表す。
 また、表2中、「酸価(μmol/g)」欄において、「重合体中における含有量」とは、重合体中の酸基を有する構成単位Dの含有量(μmol/g)を表す。また、「感光性樹脂層における含有量」とは、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対する酸基を有する構成単位Dの含有量(μmol/g)と酸基を有する低分子化合物(安息香酸)の含有量(μmol/g)の合計含有量を表す。
 また、表2中、「重合体欄」の「固形分のうち重合体の割合(%)」は、感光性樹脂層を構成する全固形分(固形分とは、感光性樹脂層を形成する成分を意図し、溶媒は含まれない。また、感光性樹脂層を形成する成分であれば、その性状が液体状であっても、固形分とみなす。)に対する、重合体の合計含有量(質量%)を意図する。なお、表2中、「固形分のうち重合体の割合(%)」と、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対する重合体の含有量(質量%)とは、略一致していた。
Table 2 is shown below.
Further, in the "ether value (μmol / g)" column in Table 2, the "content in the polymer" is the content of the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the polymer. Represents an amount (μmol / g). Further, the “content in the photosensitive resin layer” represents the content (μmol / g) of the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer.
Further, in the "amine value (μmol / g)" column in Table 2, the "content in the polymer" refers to the content (μmol / g) of the structural unit C having a basic group in the polymer. Represent. The "content in the photosensitive resin layer" is the content (μmol / g) of the structural unit C having a basic group and the content (μmol / g) of the basic compound with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. Represents the total content of.
Further, in the "acid value (μmol / g)" column in Table 2, the "content in the polymer" represents the content (μmol / g) of the structural unit D having an acid group in the polymer. .. Further, the "content in the photosensitive resin layer" is the content (μmol / g) of the structural unit D having an acid group and the low molecular weight compound (benzoic acid) having an acid group with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. Represents the total content of the content (μmol / g).
Further, in Table 2, the "ratio (%) of the polymer to the solid content" in the "polymer column" is the total solid content constituting the photosensitive resin layer (the solid content is the photosensitive resin layer). It is intended as a component and does not contain a solvent. Further, if the component forms a photosensitive resin layer, even if the property is liquid, it is regarded as a solid content) with respect to the total content of the polymer ( Mass%) is intended. In Table 2, the "ratio of the polymer to the solid content (%)" and the content of the polymer (mass%) with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer were substantially the same.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000016
 実施例の感光性転写部材は、形成されるパターンの解像性、及び、露光後の引き置きによるパターン線幅の変動の抑制(引き置き時間依存性(PED))のいずれについても優れていることが明らかである。
 実施例1~18の結果から、感光性樹脂層中、3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bの含有量が、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、12.0μmol/g以上である場合、露光後の引き置きによるパターン線幅の変動がより少なく、480.0μmol/g以下である場合、解像性がより優れることが確認できる。
 実施例1~18の結果から、感光性樹脂層中、塩基性基を有する構成単位Cと後述する塩基性化合物の合計含有量が、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、10.0μmol/g以上である場合、解像性がより優れ、60.0μmol/g以下である場合、感度がより優れることが確認できる。
 実施例1~18の結果から、感光性樹脂層中、酸基を有する構成単位Dの含有量が、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、100.0μmol/g以下である場合、露光後の引き置きによるパターン線幅の変動がより少ないことが確認できる。
 実施例1~18の結果から、感光性樹脂層中、特定重合体の含有量が、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、80質量%以上である場合、形成されるパターンの解像性がより優れることが確認できる。
The photosensitive transfer member of the example is excellent in both the resolution of the formed pattern and the suppression of the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement after exposure (detention time dependence (PED)). It is clear that.
From the results of Examples 1 to 18, the content of the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the photosensitive resin layer is 12.0 μmol / mol / relative to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. When it is g or more, the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement after exposure is smaller, and when it is 480.0 μmol / g or less, it can be confirmed that the resolution is more excellent.
From the results of Examples 1 to 18, the total content of the structural unit C having a basic group and the basic compound described later in the photosensitive resin layer is 10.0 μmol / mol / relative to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. It can be confirmed that when it is g or more, the resolution is more excellent, and when it is 60.0 μmol / g or less, the sensitivity is more excellent.
From the results of Examples 1 to 18, when the content of the structural unit D having an acid group in the photosensitive resin layer is 100.0 μmol / g or less with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, after exposure. It can be confirmed that the fluctuation of the pattern line width due to the placement of is less.
From the results of Examples 1 to 18, when the content of the specific polymer in the photosensitive resin layer is 80% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer, the resolution of the formed pattern Can be confirmed to be superior.
[実施例101(2回目:PET剥離露光)]
 100ミクロン厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、回路形成用基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得た感光性転写部材をラミネートした(ラミロール温度120℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度1.0m/min.)。その際、カバーフィルムを剥がして、感光性転写部材中の感光性樹脂層が銅層と接触するように、ラミネートを実施した。仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つ図2に示すパターンAを設けたフォトマスクを用いてコンタクトパターン露光した。その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅とITOが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、アライメントを合わせた状態で図3に示すパターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、現像、水洗を行った。その後、Cu-02を用いて銅層をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれや欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
[Example 101 (second time: PET peeling exposure)]
On a 100-micron thick PET substrate, ITO was formed as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was formed as a first layer of a conductive layer by a vacuum deposition method to a thickness of 200 nm. Then, it was used as a circuit forming substrate.
The photosensitive transfer member obtained in Example 1 was laminated on the copper layer (Lamiroll temperature 120 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 1.0 m / min.). At that time, the cover film was peeled off, and lamination was performed so that the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member was in contact with the copper layer. The contact pattern was exposed using a photomask provided with the pattern A shown in FIG. 2, which had a structure in which the conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Then, the temporary support was peeled off, developed, and washed with water to obtain pattern A. Next, the copper layer is etched with a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and then the ITO layer is etched with an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.). A substrate in which both copper and ITO were drawn in pattern A was obtained.
Next, the pattern was exposed using a photomask provided with the opening of the pattern B shown in FIG. 3 in the aligned state, and the pattern was developed and washed with water. Then, the copper layer was etched with Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off with a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Inc.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
When the obtained circuit board was observed with a microscope, there was no peeling or chipping, and the pattern was clean.
[実施例102(2回目:PET越し露光)]
 100ミクロン厚PET基材上に、第2層の導電層としてITOをスパッタリングで150nm厚にて成膜し、その上に第1層の導電層として銅を真空蒸着法で200nm厚にて成膜して、回路形成基板とした。
 銅層上に実施例1で得た感光性転写部材を巻き出してラミネートした(ロール温度120℃、線圧0.8MPa、線速度1.0m/min.)。その際、カバーフィルムを剥がして、感光性転写部材中の感光性樹脂層が銅層と接触するように、ラミネートを実施した。仮支持体を剥離せずに一方向に導電層パッドが連結された構成を持つ図2に示すパターンAを設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光した。その後仮支持体を剥離し、現像、水洗を行ってパターンAを得た。次いで銅エッチング液(関東化学(株)製Cu-02)を用いて銅層をエッチングした後、ITOエッチング液(関東化学(株)製ITO-02)を用いてITO層をエッチングすることで、銅とITOが共にパターンAで描画された基板を得た。
 次いで、残存しているレジスト上に保護層としてPET(A)(厚さ30μmのPETフィルムであり、全光ヘイズは0.19%であった。フィルムヘイズはスガ試験機(株)製ヘイズメーターHZ-2を用い、JIS-K-7136に準拠してベース小片の全光ヘイズ値(%)を測定した。)をラミネートした。この状態で、アライメントを合わせた状態で図3に示すパターンBの開口部を設けたフォトマスクを用いてパターン露光し、PET(A)を剥離した後に現像、水洗を行った。その後、Cu-02を用いて銅配線をエッチングし、残った感光性樹脂層を剥離液(関東化学(株)製KP-301)を用いて剥離し、回路配線基板を得た。
 得られた回路基板を、顕微鏡で観察したところ、剥がれや欠けなどは無く、きれいなパターンであった。
[Example 102 (second time: exposure through PET)]
On a 100-micron thick PET substrate, ITO was formed as a second conductive layer by sputtering to a thickness of 150 nm, and copper was formed as a first layer of a conductive layer by a vacuum deposition method to a thickness of 200 nm. Then, it was used as a circuit forming substrate.
The photosensitive transfer member obtained in Example 1 was unwound and laminated on a copper layer (roll temperature 120 ° C., linear pressure 0.8 MPa, linear velocity 1.0 m / min.). At that time, the cover film was peeled off, and lamination was performed so that the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member was in contact with the copper layer. The pattern was exposed using a photomask provided with the pattern A shown in FIG. 2, which had a structure in which the conductive layer pads were connected in one direction without peeling off the temporary support. Then, the temporary support was peeled off, developed, and washed with water to obtain pattern A. Next, the copper layer is etched with a copper etching solution (Cu-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.), and then the ITO layer is etched with an ITO etching solution (ITO-02 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.). A substrate in which both copper and ITO were drawn in pattern A was obtained.
Next, PET (A) (a PET film having a thickness of 30 μm was used as a protective layer on the remaining resist, and the total light haze was 0.19%. The film haze was a haze meter manufactured by Suga Test Instruments Co., Ltd. Using HZ-2, the total light haze value (%) of the base small piece was measured according to JIS-K-7136.) Was laminated. In this state, the pattern was exposed using a photomask provided with the opening of the pattern B shown in FIG. 3 in an aligned state, and after the PET (A) was peeled off, it was developed and washed with water. Then, the copper wiring was etched with Cu-02, and the remaining photosensitive resin layer was peeled off with a stripping solution (KP-301 manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.) to obtain a circuit wiring board.
When the obtained circuit board was observed with a microscope, there was no peeling or chipping, and the pattern was clean.
12:仮支持体、14:感光性樹脂層、16:カバーフィルム、100:感光性転写部材、S、SL:実線部、G:グレー部、DL:点線部 12: Temporary support, 14: Photosensitive resin layer, 16: Cover film, 100: Photosensitive transfer member, S, SL: Solid line part, G: Gray part, DL: Dotted line part

Claims (13)

  1.  仮支持体と感光性樹脂層とを有する感光性転写部材であって、
     前記感光性樹脂層が、
     重合体X及び重合体Yのいずれか1種以上と、
     光酸発生剤と、を含み、
     前記重合体Xは、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aと、3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bとを含み、
     前記重合体Yは、酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aと、3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bと、塩基性基を有する構成単位Cとを含み、
     前記感光性樹脂層中における前記3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bの含有量が、前記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、8.0~700.0μmol/gである、感光性転写部材。
     但し、前記感光性樹脂層が前記重合体Xを含む場合、前記感光性樹脂層がさらに塩基性化合物を含む。
    A photosensitive transfer member having a temporary support and a photosensitive resin layer.
    The photosensitive resin layer is
    One or more of polymer X and polymer Y,
    Contains photoacid generators,
    The polymer X contains a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group and a structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton.
    The polymer Y comprises a structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group, a structural unit B having a 3- or 4-membered ether skeleton, and a structural unit C having a basic group. Including
    The content of the structural unit B having the ether skeleton of the 3-membered ring or the 4-membered ring in the photosensitive resin layer is 8.0 to 700.0 μmol / g with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. There is a photosensitive transfer member.
    However, when the photosensitive resin layer contains the polymer X, the photosensitive resin layer further contains a basic compound.
  2.  前記塩基性基を有する構成単位Cと前記塩基性化合物の合計含有量が、前記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、3.0~100.0μmol/gである、請求項1に記載の感光性転写部材。 The first aspect of the present invention, wherein the total content of the structural unit C having a basic group and the basic compound is 3.0 to 100.0 μmol / g with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. Photosensitive transfer member.
  3.  前記感光性樹脂層中、酸基を有する低分子化合物と、酸基を有する構成単位を含む重合体中に含まれる前記酸基を有する構成単位との合計含有量が、前記感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、100.0μmol/g以下である、請求項1又は2に記載の感光性転写部材。 The total content of the low molecular weight compound having an acid group in the photosensitive resin layer and the structural unit having an acid group contained in the polymer containing the structural unit having an acid group is the total content of the photosensitive resin layer. The photosensitive transfer member according to claim 1 or 2, which is 100.0 μmol / g or less based on the total mass.
  4.  前記重合体X及び前記重合体Y中における酸分解性基で保護された酸基を有する構成単位Aが、下記式A3で表される構成単位である、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写部材。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

     式中、R31及びR32は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基、又はアリール基を表す。但し、R31及びR32の少なくとも一方は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。R33は、アルキル基又はアリール基を表す。R34は、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。Xは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。なお、R31又はR32と、R33とが互いに連結して、3員環又は4員環以外の環状エーテルを形成していてもよい。
    Any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the structural unit A having an acid group protected by an acid-degradable group in the polymer X and the polymer Y is a structural unit represented by the following formula A3. The photosensitive transfer member according to.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001

    In the formula, R 31 and R 32 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an aryl group. However, at least one of R 31 and R 32 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 33 represents an alkyl group or an aryl group. R 34 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. X 0 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. In addition, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 may be connected to each other to form a cyclic ether other than a 3-membered ring or a 4-membered ring.
  5.  前記式A3で表される構成単位中、R31又はR32と、R33とが互いに連結して5員環又は6員環の環状エーテルを形成している、請求項4に記載の感光性転写部材。 The photosensitive unit according to claim 4, wherein in the structural unit represented by the formula A3, R 31 or R 32 and R 33 are connected to each other to form a 5-membered ring or 6-membered ring cyclic ether. Transfer member.
  6.  前記重合体X及び前記重合体Y中における3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bが、下記式B1~B3で表される部分構造のいずれか有する構造単位である、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写部材。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

     式B2中、Rb0は、水素原子、又はアルキル基を表す。
    Claimed that the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the polymer X and the polymer Y is a structural unit having any of the partial structures represented by the following formulas B1 to B3. The photosensitive transfer member according to any one of 1 to 5.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

    In formula B2, R b0 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  7.  前記重合体X及び前記重合体Y中における3員環又は4員環のエーテル骨格を有する構成単位Bが、下記式B11~B13で表される構造単位からなる群から選択される、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写部材。
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

     式中、Rb1は、水素原子、又はメチル基を表す。
    Claim 1 in which the structural unit B having a 3-membered ring or 4-membered ring ether skeleton in the polymer X and the polymer Y is selected from the group consisting of structural units represented by the following formulas B11 to B13. The photosensitive transfer member according to any one of 6 to 6.
    Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

    In the formula, R b1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  8.  上記重合体X及び上記重合体Yの合計含有量が、感光性樹脂層の全質量に対して、80質量%以上である、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写部材。 The photosensitive transfer member according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the total content of the polymer X and the polymer Y is 80% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the photosensitive resin layer. ..
  9.  前記重合体Yを含む、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写部材。 The photosensitive transfer member according to any one of claims 1 to 8, which contains the polymer Y.
  10.  前記重合体Xを含む、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写部材。 The photosensitive transfer member according to any one of claims 1 to 8, which contains the polymer X.
  11.  請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写部材中の前記感光性樹脂層の前記仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を基板に接触させて、前記感光性転写部材と前記基板と貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、をこの順に含む、樹脂パターンの製造方法。
    The surface of the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member according to any one of claims 1 to 10 opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the substrate, and the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate are brought into contact with each other. And the process of pasting together
    The process of pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer and
    A method for producing a resin pattern, which comprises a step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern in this order.
  12.  請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写部材中の前記感光性樹脂層の前記仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を、導電層を有する基板中の前記導電層に接触させて、前記感光性転写部材と前記導電層を有する基板とを貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、
     前記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における前記導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む、回路配線の製造方法。
    The surface of the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member according to any one of claims 1 to 10 opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the conductive layer in the substrate having the conductive layer. In the process of bonding the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate having the conductive layer,
    The process of pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer and
    A step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern, and
    A method for manufacturing a circuit wiring, comprising, in this order, a step of etching the conductive layer in a region where the resin pattern is not arranged.
  13.  請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の感光性転写部材中の前記感光性樹脂層の前記仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を、導電層を有する基板中の前記導電層に接触させて、前記感光性転写部材と前記導電層を有する基板とを貼り合わせる工程と、
     前記感光性樹脂層をパターン露光する工程と、
     露光された前記感光性樹脂層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する工程と、
     前記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における前記導電層をエッチング処理する工程と、をこの順に含む、タッチパネルの製造方法。
    The surface of the photosensitive resin layer in the photosensitive transfer member according to any one of claims 1 to 10 opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the conductive layer in the substrate having the conductive layer. In the process of bonding the photosensitive transfer member and the substrate having the conductive layer,
    The process of pattern exposure of the photosensitive resin layer and
    A step of developing the exposed photosensitive resin layer to form a resin pattern, and
    A method for manufacturing a touch panel, comprising, in this order, a step of etching the conductive layer in a region where the resin pattern is not arranged.
PCT/JP2020/025664 2019-08-02 2020-06-30 Photosensitive transfer member, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel WO2021024650A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202080055251.3A CN114207525A (en) 2019-08-02 2020-06-30 Photosensitive transfer member, method for manufacturing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
JP2021537622A JPWO2021024650A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2020-06-30

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019142786 2019-08-02
JP2019-142786 2019-08-02

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021024650A1 true WO2021024650A1 (en) 2021-02-11

Family

ID=74502936

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2020/025664 WO2021024650A1 (en) 2019-08-02 2020-06-30 Photosensitive transfer member, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2021024650A1 (en)
CN (1) CN114207525A (en)
TW (1) TW202112856A (en)
WO (1) WO2021024650A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009188318A (en) * 2008-02-08 2009-08-20 Jsr Corp Pattern forming method
JP2014010382A (en) * 2012-07-02 2014-01-20 Fujifilm Corp Photosensitive transfer material, cured film and production method of the same, organic electroluminescence (el) display device, liquid crystal display device and electrostatic capacitance type input device
JP2018189754A (en) * 2017-04-28 2018-11-29 富士フイルム株式会社 Transfer material, method for producing transfer material, method for forming pattern, and method for forming metal pattern

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5506621B2 (en) * 2009-10-16 2014-05-28 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, method for forming cured film, organic EL display device, and liquid crystal display device
JP5451569B2 (en) * 2009-10-16 2014-03-26 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, cured film, method for forming cured film, organic EL display device, and liquid crystal display device
KR101912158B1 (en) * 2011-09-22 2018-10-26 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 A positive-type photosensitive acrylic resin and positive-type photosensitive resin composition
JP6096202B2 (en) * 2012-09-28 2017-03-15 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition and method for producing pattern using the same
WO2014065352A1 (en) * 2012-10-26 2014-05-01 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, cured product and manufacturing method thereof, resin pattern production method, cured film, organic el display device, liquid crystal display device, and touch panel display device
TW201520695A (en) * 2013-09-25 2015-06-01 Fujifilm Corp Photo-sensitive resin composition, method for manufacturing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device and organic EL display device
JP6224725B2 (en) * 2013-10-30 2017-11-01 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, method for producing cured film, cured film, liquid crystal display device, and organic EL display device
JP6808045B2 (en) * 2017-07-28 2021-01-06 富士フイルム株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009188318A (en) * 2008-02-08 2009-08-20 Jsr Corp Pattern forming method
JP2014010382A (en) * 2012-07-02 2014-01-20 Fujifilm Corp Photosensitive transfer material, cured film and production method of the same, organic electroluminescence (el) display device, liquid crystal display device and electrostatic capacitance type input device
JP2018189754A (en) * 2017-04-28 2018-11-29 富士フイルム株式会社 Transfer material, method for producing transfer material, method for forming pattern, and method for forming metal pattern

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114207525A (en) 2022-03-18
TW202112856A (en) 2021-04-01
JPWO2021024650A1 (en) 2021-02-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI660237B (en) Photosensitive transfer material, pattern forming method and etching method
JP6752749B2 (en) Manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer material and circuit wiring
KR102110818B1 (en) Method for manufacturing a substrate on which a pattern is formed, and method for manufacturing a circuit board
JP6999693B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, and wiring manufacturing method
JP6995865B2 (en) Manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer material and manufacturing method of circuit wiring
JPWO2020105457A1 (en) Transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JPWO2020066351A1 (en) Manufacturing method of patterned base material, manufacturing method of circuit board and manufacturing method of touch panel
JP6992097B2 (en) Resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6821046B2 (en) Circuit wiring manufacturing method and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6893550B2 (en) Manufacturing method of photosensitive transfer material and circuit wiring
JPWO2019146380A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material and its manufacturing method, resin pattern manufacturing method, and circuit wiring manufacturing method
JP6968273B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method.
JP6832899B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6812556B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
TWI746802B (en) Photosensitive transfer materials, method for producing circuit wiring and method for producing touch panel
WO2021024650A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer member, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel
JP6995873B2 (en) Circuit board manufacturing method and touch panel manufacturing method
JP6808045B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
JP7011047B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing resist pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, touch panel, and touch panel display device.
WO2019151534A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, manufacturing method for circuit wiring, and manufacturing method for touch panel
JP6830398B2 (en) Method for producing a polymer solution for a photosensitive transfer material, a method for producing a composition for a photosensitive transfer material, a method for producing a photosensitive transfer material, a method for producing a circuit wiring, a method for producing a touch panel, a method for producing a polymer solution for a photosensitive transfer material. Compositions used in the production of, polymer solutions for photosensitive transfer materials, compositions for photosensitive transfer materials and photosensitive transfer materials
JP7011046B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resist pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, touch panel, and touch panel display device
JP6685460B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
WO2019225363A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and method for manufacturing touch panel
JPWO2020174767A1 (en) Patterned board manufacturing method, circuit board manufacturing method, touch panel manufacturing method, and laminate

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20850531

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2021537622

Country of ref document: JP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20850531

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1